Protocase Designer Documentation - User contributions [en]

Face Editor

2026-03-26T17:36:51Z

Amacdonald: /* Using the Masking object type */

=Face Editor overview=
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.

[[File:Face Editor 1 Face Editor Overview.PNG|1000px|Face Editor Window]] 

[[File:Face Editor 2 Design Toolbar.PNG]] 

;2D Design bar
:Contains Cutout, Graphic, Masking, Reference and Exclusion, with the common drawing types (circle, ellipse, rectangle, path, line, arc, etc).

;2D Tools Bar
:Contains common tools such as move, trim, pattern, measure, dimension, coordinates.

===Face Editor preferences===
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]] in the 3D Viewer. 

=Viewing the face=

Click the View tab in the toolbar to see all of your viewing options.

[[File:View Toolbar.PNG]]

==Zooming==
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following.
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Face Editor Zoom In.PNG|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Face Editor Zoom Out.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.
:*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' > '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom. 
*To zoom in on a particular area:
*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom. 

==Resetting the view==
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Face Editor Reset View.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.
*Choose '''View''' > '''Reset View'''. 

==Viewing the front or back of the face==
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, click '''Back'' in the View Tab. 
[[File:Viewing the Front or the Back of the face front and back.PNG|200px]] 

=Coordinate System=
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.

[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]] 

===Choosing the Units of Measure===

You can set the default unit of measure.

#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM).
#Click '''OK.''' 

=Quick Search=
Instead of using the Library Manager to find the specific item you want to place, you can use the Quick Search tab to quickly find and place an item from our Library. 
[[File:Quick Search initial screen.PNG|800px]]
*Use the drop-down menu to search for the item you're looking for. Be as specific as possible.
[[File:Quick Search finding fastener.PNG|800px]]
*Select the item and click the button labelled 'Place Item'.
[[File:Quick Search Place Item.PNG|800px]]
*This tool can be especially useful for finding a specific fastener you need, by searching the part number.
 

=Drawing shapes=

==Selecting the drawing (object) type==
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''. 
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the "Mode" label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''. 
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]] 
 

===Using the Cutout object type===
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]] 

===Using the Graphic object type===
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.

====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press <Enter>. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.).
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is "None"; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads.
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish.
:*The printed area must be no more than 46"x46", and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24" high.
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed. 

=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Preferences'''.
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to "Graphic" for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.)
#Click '''OK'''. 

=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change.
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu.
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]] 

===Using the Exclusion object type===
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.

===Using the Masking object type===
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust. 
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked. 
'''Notes''' 
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1". 

===Using the Construct object type===
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production. 

==Drawing circles==
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing ellipses==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing rectangles and squares==
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing custom paths==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape. 

====Creating an arc using the Path tool====
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment).
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press <a>.
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer.
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size.
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing <A>).
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.) 

====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.

'''''To merge two or more objects'''''
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object.
#:[[File:Merge two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.)
#:[[File:Merge Select Objects.PNG]]
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu.
#:[[File:Merge Right Click and choose Merge.PNG]]
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout.
#:[[File:Merged into single cutout.PNG]] 
'''''To edit a merged object''''' 
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.
:[[File:Edit a Merged Object.PNG]] [[File:Merge move node of object.PNG]] 
'''Note''' If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. 
'''''To trim two or more objects''''' 
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.
#Place a circle on the face.
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it.
#:[[File:Trim two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.
#:[[File:Trim Select both objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Trim''' button.
#:[[File:Trim button.PNG]]
#:The outline of each object is outlined.
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]
#Use your cursor to eliminate the lines you do not want.
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode. '''Important!''' If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved. 
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such.
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]] 
'''See Also: '''
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]

====Solving problems with merging objects====
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.
 
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom: 
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]] 
If you then merge them and click <Esc>, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view.
 
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic.
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle.
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well.
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]
#When completed, click the <Esc> key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly. 

==Drawing lines==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.
#Drag to set the end of the line.
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing arcs==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc.
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc.
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc.
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Adding text==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.
#Click on the face and begin typing.
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''<Enter>''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time.
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''', and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''. 

====Adding special characters====
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.

There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.

If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows.
#Copy the character.
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:
#;[[File:Adding special characters.PNG|border|500px]]
#:'''Tip''' The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:
#;[[File:Registered trademark symbol text field of its own.PNG|500px]] 

'''See Also''' 
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]''' 

==Adding images==
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed. 
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/ '''Spotting the Difference''']. 
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed.
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.)
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received.
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves.
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.
'''Notes''': 
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit->Preferences->Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer.
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins.
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text->Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the "ghost" image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as "Plain SVG". This should allow the SVG image to import.
 
====Exporting images====
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export.
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens.
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. 

==Importing fonts==
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.
#Select '''Import font'''.
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.
'''Notes''':
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it.
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts.
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''

=Using the Measure tool=
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]] 

==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool initial selection of objects.PNG|600px]] 
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Move''' tool or press <Esc>. 

==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.
#Click the centre of the circle cutout.
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500px]]
#Enter "5" in '''x difference''' and "-3" in '''y difference'''.
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)
 

==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500 px]]
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of "1" and an '''x difference''' of "1".
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel. 

==Displaying measurements==
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes. 
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points''''' 
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Dimension Button.PNG|75px|bottom]]
#:The distance of "0.000" is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint.
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor.
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed.
#:[[File:Measure and display the distance between two points actual.PNG|500px]]
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green.
#:[[File:Green circle drawn around the snap-to point.PNG||500px]]
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:
#::The distance between the two points;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure.
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed. The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle.
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse.
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way.
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - 0 position.PNG|500px]]
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - near object.PNG|500px]]
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - snap point.PNG|500px]] 

'''''To delete a displayed measurement''''' 
Do either of the following:
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu.
*Highlight the line and press the <Delete> key. 

=Using the grid=
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects. 

Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel.

===Turn on/off the Grid===
#In the View tab, go the Grid section
#[[File:Snap to Grid.PNG|200px]]
#*Click the Show checkbox to show the Grid.
[[File:Turn on-off the grid Show grid.PNG|600px]]

===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===
#To have your objects snap to the Grid:
#*Click the Snap checkbox 

===Changing grid size and offset===
#On the View tab of the toolbar, click the Size icon [[File:Changing Grid Size icon.PNG|bottom]] in the Grid section.
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:
:[[File:Changing Grid Size.PNG|300px]]
 
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}
[[File:Grid with 1 in width and height, 1 in offset width and offset height.PNG|500px]]
 

=Managing object properties=

[[File:Top of Properties Panel.PNG|thumb|Properties panel view]]

[[File:Object Type needs to be called Path Type.PNG|thumb]]

===Top of Properties Panel===
[[File:Top of Properties Panel A.PNG]]
* The Properties Panel has the following tabs: Properties, Notes, Layers, Mode Help

*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.

===Fill===
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.

===Line Thickness===
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.

===Color===
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu.

===Type===
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.
* Object types include:
:Cutout
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)
:Exclusion
:Construct

===Origin===
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:
:'''Circles''' -- centre
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner
:'''Paths''' -- start point
:'''Lines''' -- start point
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner 
'''See Also''' 
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]

===Circles===
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.
===Ellipses===
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).
===Rectangles===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Lines===
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.
===Images===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Text===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.

===Path===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise 

==Adding notes==
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering & Design Services team. For example:
* "Notch in this bend."
* "Put a hinged door over this cutout."
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering & Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering & Design Services will give you the correct quote. 
'''''To add a note to an object'''''
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note.
#Go to the Notes tab in the Properties Panel to create a new note. Click the Green + Button to create a new note.
#;[[File:Notes Tab.PNG|500px]]
#;Enter your note, then click OK.
#;[[File:Add New Note.PNG|500px]]
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time. 
'''''To add a general note'''''
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' button.
#;[[File:To add a general note.PNG|500px]]
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it. 
'''''To delete a note'''''
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button. 
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View > View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance.
#:[[File:Review All notes.PNG|500 px]]
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected. 

=Adding cutouts=
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure. 
'''See Also:''' 
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]] 

===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutouts''' from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#;[[File:Cutout Library.PNG|150px]]
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description.
#;[[File:Adding a cutout by browsing the cutout library.PNG|500px]]
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout.
#;[[File:Click the Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.
#;[[File:Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process. 

==Adding "D" port cutouts==
You can add a "D"-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel.
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it.
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]] 

==Adding a circular gauge==
You can add a circular gauge graphic, which is a circle or arc shape with numbered notches, according to your requirements.
#In the Face Editor, choose ''' Place Circular Gauge ''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it.
#Once the circular gauge is placed, click ''' Move Item ''' or press Escape so that your circular gauge is selected.
#You can customize the circular gauge to your requirements, including color, line thickness, number of ticks, angle, label and more.

=Adding hardware=
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles.

==Adding self-clinching fasteners==
Protocase uses PEM® brand self-clinching fasteners.
#In the Face Editor, choose Fasteners from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#:[[File:Adding Self Clinching Fasteners.PNG|300px]]
#:The Fasteners section of the Library Manager opens.
#:[[File:Library Manager self clinching fasteners.PNG|500px]]
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)
#Select the thread '''Length'''.
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed.
#Select a '''Part Number'''.
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature. 
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with "ZI".) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones.
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.
#:Place the fastener on the face.
#:[[File:Self Clinching Fastener Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Move''' button or press the '''Esc''' key.
#:[[File:Self clinching fasteners in 3D viewer.PNG|500px]] 
'''See Also''': 
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']] 

==Adding hardware such as handles==
#In the '''Library''' drop-down menu, click '''Hardware'''
#:[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px]]
#Browse the hardware items to find the item you need.
#:[[File:Library Manager Hardware.PNG|500px]]
#Select the hardware item you want to use, and click '''Place This Item'''
#Place item on the face where you want it.
#Click Save to view your design in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:Hardware Handles 3D viewer.PNG|500px]]

==Adding Rubber Feet==
#On the Library drop-down menu in the right corner, select Hardware and click '''GO'''.
#;[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px|]]
#Choose the folder labelled '''Rubber Feet'''. Select the rubber foot you require: Large Rubber Foot, Medium Rubber Foot, Small Rubber Foot or Tapered (which is attached via adhesive).
#;[[File:Library Manager Rubber Feet.PNG|600px|]]
#Click '''Place This Item''' to place the rubber foot in your desired location.
#In order to have a stable enclosure, you will then need to place the same rubber foot in the other three corners of your enclosure.
#;[[File:Rubber Feet Placed in Face Editor.PNG|600px|]]
#The Protocase Engineering team recommends placing each rubber foot at least 0.5 or 1 inch away from the edges of your enclosure. If your enclosure is very large, you may go even farther from the edge if required.
#;[[File:Medium Rubber feet in 3D viewer.PNG|600px|]]

==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==
====Adding a countersink to a face====
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole.
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Adding a countersink to a face.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of "100.0° #2" indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.
#;[[File:Countersink Metal Thickness.PNG|600px]]
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png|200px]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera. 

====Adding a tapped hole to a face====
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole.
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Tapped Hole.PNG|500px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of "2-56 [0.07]" indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07" for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.)
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face. 
#:[[File:Tapped Hole solid circle with partial circle around it.PNG]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.
 

====Adding screws to a face====
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''.
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener. 

====Replacing screws and PEMs====
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the fastener. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it.
#Right-click and select '''Replace PEMs''' from the menu that displays.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs right click.PNG|300px]]
#The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the fastener you wish to use, and then click the '''Place This Item'' to select this fastener instead of the existing one.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs choose new fastener.PNG|600px]]

==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure. 
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''
#Click '''New'''.
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens.
#:[[File:Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly click new.PNG|250 px]]
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary.
#:[[File:Choose the bracket you want to customize.PNG|600 px]]
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button.
#:The 3D View window opens.
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the left hand panel.
#You will be prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure).
#:The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:Sub-assembly dialog.PNG|500 px]]
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is "L Bracket by Base - Bottom". ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''
#:'''Part Number'''
#:'''Description'''
#Click '''OK.'''
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu. 
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face. 

'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure.
#Click the '''Place Item''' button.
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon.
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.
#Specify how you would like your sub-assembly attached: '''welding, self-clinching fasteners or other'''.
#Whether you choose welding or self-clinching fasteners, please provide as many specific details as you can. (Ex: specify the type of welding you would like, such as tack weld, plug weld, etc).
# For self-clinching fasteners, please provide as much detail as to what fastener you would like used. Ex: nuts, studs or standoffs. Include all of the key information, including part number, thread size and length. If you do not have a specific preference, please advise our Engineering & Design Services team that they may choose the most logical option.
#Choose "other" if you'd prefer to attach your sub-assembly yourself once you receive the completed order.
#'''Note''': Once you order your design, our Engineering & Design Services team may contact you if they require more information or need to clarify details.
#View video tutorial about sub-assemblies: https://youtu.be/XciURDevnXA
 

=Adding Graphics from the Graphics Library=

The Graphics Library allows you to place common symbols and graphics, such as USB, Electrical Ground and Caution.
#Once in the Face Editor, you can access the Library by selecting Graphics from the drop-down Library menu in the top corner.
#[[File:Graphics from Graphics Library.PNG|400px]]
#The Graphics library is organized by category: Electronic Symbols, Flags, Marks, Warning & Caution Symbols and Other. Click on the Category to expand the list and see all of the graphic symbols available.
#[[File:Library manager Graphics Library.PNG|600px]]
#Once you’ve found the graphic symbol you want to place on your design, click the symbol name and then click Place This Item. Resize and relocate the graphics symbol, just as you would with any other object.

Note: You can also change the color of your symbol, so long as the symbol you’ve placed is only one color in nature. (Any symbol that is more than one color, such as Electrostatic Sensitivity, Laser, Pacemaker and Two Person Lift, cannot be altered with different colors. Flag graphics' colors also cannot be changed).

=Adding Components from Library=
Protocase Designer's Library Manager includes a tab for Components, where you can quickly and easily download boards, connectors, drives, fans, heatsinks, LCD screens and power supplies, and then place on you rdesign.

==Add Components from Library==
#Once in the Face Editor, select Components from the Library drop-down menu in the top-right corner.
#You will see a small dialog box open that says Syncing Library. This This is an important step for being able to access all of the parts of the Library Manager.
#Click on tab labeled "Components." Scroll through the list of categories to find your desired component category type.
#Click on the component you wish to use. In order to access the component, you will need to download it to your local copy of Protocase Designer. Click Download.
#Once the component file has been downloaded, you will see three buttons: Place this item, Export to File and Create Personal Copy.
#Once you click Place this item, you will be prompted to choose your mounting fasteners, in the exact same way that you would see when you are importing your own STEP file of a component in your design.

==Save a Personal Copy of a Component in Your Library==
#If you want to save a copy of a component from the library with your desired fasteners, stay in the Face Editor.
#Click on the component you've placed with fasteners. Once it is selected, you will see a button on the right-hand menu called "Add to Library". Once you click this button, you will be prompted to edit the properties, including adding a personalized name for the component.
#Once you click OK, the grouped component will be saved in your personal library. You can access it and place it on your design by clicking the Personal tab in the Library Manager.

==Contribute to the Library Manager==
#You may save a cutout, graphic or component from your Personal Library and contribute it to the Public Library.
#Click the Add to Public Library button. Select the applicable category and sub-category, then click submit.
#The Protocase Designer team moderates the submissions - which can take 1-2 business days.
#Once your submission is cleared, the cutout, graphic or component you've added will show up in the public library.
#Remember – you should only add items to the public library if you want it to be accessible to others. Proprietary items for your organization should be kept to your own personal library.

=Importing Components=
You can import STEP or DXF components of circuit boards, fans and other accessories.

==Importing STEP Files==
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, in the right-hand corner, select '''Import 3D Component''' from the Import/Export Dropdown Menu.
#:[[File:1 Import Export Drop down Go.PNG|400px]]
#Protocase Designer will open a browser window so you can select the STEP file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#If your file is very large, Protocase Designer will display a loading warning. If the software takes longer than a minute or two to import your component, you may need to simplify the STEP file before importing it.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#:[[File:2 Component Choose Mating Face.PNG|600px]]
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
[[File:4 PEM Editor Dialog.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''Place Fasteners''' to open the Fasteners library. Choose the fastener you'd like to place.
#:[[File:5 Choose Fasteners and click Place This Item.PNG|600px]]
#Place the fastener in the appropriate mounting holes.
#:[[File:6 Place the Fastener where you want the component mounted.PNG|600px]]
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:7 once youve clicked Save to save your changes, you will see your component with fasteners in the Face Editor on your model.PNG|600px]]
 

==Importing DXF Files==
#Importing a DXF file of a component follows many of the same steps as importing a STEP file, with a few additional steps required.
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, under Imports, click Component. Protocase designer will open a browser window so you can select the DXF file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#Once Protocase Designer detects it is a DXF file being imported, an additional window will display that will allow you to customize how the DXF will be imported.
##Layers: DXF files contain many layers, and Protocase Designer cannot detect which layers actually need to be used. Use this tool to select which layers of your DXF you'd like to import.
##Thickness: Protocase Designer cannot automatically detect the thickness of your DXF file, so you can use this tool to set your thickness. Two important things to note – the thickness value is in inches – and your thickness choice will not be visible until the component is displayed in Protocase Designer’s 3D Editor.
##Units: Protocase Designer cannot currently detect units in DXF files (we are working on this!), so you will need to change the expected units. You can view the over bounds, which are displayed in inches. If you change the unit of measurement, the software will update the over bounds automatically. If your ideal unit of measurement is not listed as an option, you will need to convert the DXF’s units to inches before importing into Protocase Designer.
[[File:1 DXF Properties Selection.PNG|600px]]
#Once you have addressed Layers, Thickness and Units and made your desired changes, click the Accept button to save your changes and close the import tool. Protocase Designer will use the data you entered to generate a component from the DXF file you originally imported.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
(Tip: Make sure "Snap to Grid" is turned off, as it will allow you to place your fasteners precisely where you require them).
[[File:File:2 DXF Place Fasteners.PNG|600px]]
#Click the checkmark to save your changes.
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:3 DXF in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

==Changing Your Mounting Fasteners==
#Because you placed your mounting self-clinching fasteners in the Secondary Face Editor (as recommended), Protocase Designer makes your components and the fasteners a grouped object.
#Select your component (which is a grouped object with your fasteners). Right click to open the context menu, hover over 'Tools', then select 'Edit Component'.
#You will return to the Secondary Face Editor, where you can select and delete the fasteners you previously chose, and add in new ones as needed.
#To quickly replace the existing fasteners with new ones, while holding Shift, left click all the fasteners to select them, then right click and hover over the 'PEMs' menu, and choose 'Replace PEMs'. This will open the fasteners library, and once you select a new fastener and click 'Place This Item' - it will swap all of the selected fasteners with the new one you've chosen.

==Use Component Projection==
#Use the Component Projection feature to view an outline of your components when editing other faces in your Protocase Designer assembly.
#Once in the Face Editor, click on the View tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:View tab in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]
#In the Components section, click the '''Show Outline''' checkbox.
#:[[File:View Tab in Face Editor Component Projection Outline.PNG|300px]]
#To control the amount of detail shown in your component projection outline, use the slider. Far left means very little detail. The farther to the right you go, the level of detail increases.
#:[[File:Component Projection in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

=Manipulating objects=
==Selecting object(s)==
#On the '''Design''' tab in the Face Editor toolbar, select the '''Move''' tool. [[File:tool -edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]
#Do one of the following:
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.
#*To select multiple objects:
#**Click the first object, then down the <Shift> key and click the other objects; or
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects.
#:[[File:Selecting Objects.PNG|600px]]
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.
#:[[File:Light Blue box is drawn.PNG|300px]]

==Editing object(s)==
'''''To edit a single object''''' 
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''.
''or''
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type.
 
'''''To edit a group''''' 
*To edit a group, you must right-click to ungroup the items, then edit the object(s) individually. If you wish, you can right-click to make the objects a group once more.

==Moving object(s)==
To move a single object: 
#Select the object.
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location. 

To move several objects: 
#Select all the objects.
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location. 

To move cutouts from one face to another:
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items.
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with.
:For detailed instructions, see:
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]] 

==Locking item(s)==
To lock a single object:
#Select the object.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the item.
#:[[File:Locking items.PNG|600px]]
 
To Lock several objects:
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the items. 

==Grouping and ungrouping objects==
'''''To group objects'''''

#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the <Shift> key and select each object.
#Right click and select Group from the menu that displays.
#:[[File:1 Right click to Group Objects.PNG|400px]]
#Your objects are now grouped as one single object, which you can move around on the face of your model.
#:[[File:1 Grouped Object.PNG|400px]]
 
'''''To ungroup objects'''''
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.
#Click the group.
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel. 
'''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement. 
'''See Also'''
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]] 

==Aligning and distributing objects==
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.

#Select 2 or more objects.
#With the objects selected, right click and select either Align or Distribute the menu. 
#:[[File:Align Objects with objects selected.PNG|500px]]
'''Alignment''' 
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects 
 
'''''Notes:'''''
*Objects align to the first object selected.
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.

'''Distribute''' 
#:[[File:Distribute Horizontally.PNG|500px]]

[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops 
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects 

==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==
#You can find the cut, copy, paste, undo and redo functions in the '''Edit''' section of the Design tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:Cutting copying and pasting objects buttons.PNG|200px]]
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button.
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button.
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor.
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Move''' tool or press the <Esc> key when you are done. 

Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] buttons in the Edit section of the toolbar. 

==Adding and managing layers==
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.

'''Layer Toolbar'''

Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list.
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.)
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer.

'''''To add a new layer '''''
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel.
#:[[File:Adding and managing layers.PNG|300px]]
#:The Input dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer.

'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed.
#Paste the object(s).

'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list. 

==Using the Array Tool==
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool,
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects.

'''To create an array:'''
#Click the "Edit Face" button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.
#With the object highlighted, select the "Pattern" tool in the Design tab of the toolbar.
#:[[File:Array pattern icon.PNG|100px]]
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)
#:[[File:Select Array Type.PNG|200px]]

You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:

'''A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:'''
*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)
*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)
*Quantity (the number of objects in the array
#:[[File:Array Linear Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)
*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)
*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)
#:[[File:Array Circular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*X Spacing (horizontal spacing)
*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)
*X Quantity (number of columns)
*Y Quantity (number of rows)
#:[[File:Array Rectangular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the "ungroup" button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that
your objects are properly spaced.

#:[[File:Resize array.PNG|400px]]

=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=

===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===
#To print all faces of the enclosure, go to the '''View''' tab of the toolbar in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:View Print icon.PNG|400px]]
#Click the Print icon.
#:[[File:Print Icon.PNG|100px]]
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.
#:[[File:Print to Scale.PNG|400px]]
#Click '''Print.'''

===To calibrate the printer===
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button.
#A test page opens.
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle.
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens.
#If the printed rectangle is not 3" x 3", then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''. 
 

=Exporting and importing face templates=
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer. 
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.
#Select '''Graphics > Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics > Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image.
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.

Main Page

2023-11-01T18:44:35Z

Amacdonald:

'''We strongly recommend that you download the latest version of Protocase Designer to ensure the software is up to date in terms of features and fixes.''' 
===Download for free [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/download/ here]. View the latest release notes [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Release_Notes here].===

='''Protocase Designer® Documentation'''=

__NOTOC__

Welcome to the Protocase Designer documentation wiki! This wiki provides instructions on how to install, configure, and operate Designer to your best advantage.

You can browse the material using the sidebar (to the left of this screen) or the Contents (below).

To search for information on a specific topic, use the '''Search''' button and text field in the upper right of the screen. Use quotation marks around phases.

==User Guide==

====[[Glossary]]====
A glossary of terms used at Protocase, Inc., and in Protocase Designer.

====[[Quick Start]]====
How to install Protocase Designer and use it to create, customize, and order your custom electronic enclosure.

====[[3D View Window]]====
An overview of the main interface for viewing the 3D model of your enclosure, which is used for creating, opening, and saving files, and for selecting the face you want to edit.

====[[Face Editor|Face Editor Window]]====
Using the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics (text and/or images), exclusions, masking, and construction lines.

====[[Cutout Library]]====
Adding custom cutouts, standard fasteners, and mounting hardware from the Cutout Library. This section also includes instructions on importing DXF files.

====[[Instant Quotes and Purchasing]]====
Registering, requesting instant quotes, and purchasing your custom electronic enclosure.

====[[Tutorials|Tutorials and Technical Papers]] ====
Technical papers and step-by-step tutorials showing how to design custom enclosures for common applications. This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.

====[[Tell Me About...]]====
Overviews on graphics (digital print and silkscreening), finishing, and other features; each topic includes links to all related topics in both this wiki and the Protocase website. This section is for anyone submitting a design, whether Protocase Designer or another CAD program is used.

====[[Release Notes]]====
New features and enhancements in each version of Designer.

==Get Help==

====[[FAQ]]====
Frequently asked questions about using Protocase Designer and this wiki.

====[[Knowledgebase]]====
Includes:
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Known_Issues|'''Known Issues''']]
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Software_Fixes_Released|'''Software Fixes Released''', with links to the latest Beta release]]
:* [[Knowledgebase_-_Planned_Enhancements|'''Planned Enhancements''']]
:* [[Uninstalling_Protocase_Designer|'''How to Uninstall Protocase Designer''']]
:* [[Potential Welding Delays|'''Potential Welding delays and work around''']]

====[http://forum.protocase.com/ Forum]====
A support forum for users to ask questions, share experiences, report bugs, and check enhancements. Protocase Designer developers monitor and participate in the forum.

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:59:13Z

Amacdonald: /* Contributing a custom cutout to the online library */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]] 
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a New Item in Your Personal Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, select the Personal tab and click the '''New Item''' button.
#:[[File:Create new item from library manager.png|300px]]
#The New Library Item dialog opens.
#[[File:New library item.png|400px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#When you click OK, you will be taken to your object editor, where you will create the object that you need using all of the same tools in the Face Editor.
#[[File:Create new object in editor.PNG|400px]]
#When done, click '''Save'''. The custom object you've created is now is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Library Manager. 

==Saving an object to your Personal Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout, graphic, masking, exclusion of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, right-click and select '''Add to Library'''
[[File:Add cutout to library.png|400px]] 
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, right-click and select '''Group'''. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' in the right-hand. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:Edit new library item.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', '''Link''' and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the Personal tab of the Library Manager. 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a custom cutout to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Personal library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Library Manager
#From the '''Personal''' tab, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload''' button.
#[[File:Upload to online library.png]]
#The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Upload to library information.PNG|400px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#*Enter your email address (and you can opt to remember that email for future uploads.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 
#Our Engineering & Design Services team will review your submission. Once it is verified, your cutout will be publicly available in the Cutout tab.

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:58:52Z

Amacdonald: /* Contributing a custom cutout to the online library */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]] 
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a New Item in Your Personal Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, select the Personal tab and click the '''New Item''' button.
#:[[File:Create new item from library manager.png|300px]]
#The New Library Item dialog opens.
#[[File:New library item.png|400px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#When you click OK, you will be taken to your object editor, where you will create the object that you need using all of the same tools in the Face Editor.
#[[File:Create new object in editor.PNG|400px]]
#When done, click '''Save'''. The custom object you've created is now is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Library Manager. 

==Saving an object to your Personal Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout, graphic, masking, exclusion of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, right-click and select '''Add to Library'''
[[File:Add cutout to library.png|400px]] 
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, right-click and select '''Group'''. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' in the right-hand. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:Edit new library item.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', '''Link''' and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the Personal tab of the Library Manager. 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a custom cutout to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Personal library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Library Manager
#From the '''Personal''' tab, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload''' button.
#[[File:Upload to online library.png]]
#The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Upload to library information.PNG|400px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Enter your email address (and you can opt to remember that email for future uploads.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 
#Our Engineering & Design Services team will review your submission. Once it is verified, your cutout will be publicly available in the Cutout tab.

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:54:37Z

Amacdonald: /* Contributing a custom cutout to the online library */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]] 
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a New Item in Your Personal Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, select the Personal tab and click the '''New Item''' button.
#:[[File:Create new item from library manager.png|300px]]
#The New Library Item dialog opens.
#[[File:New library item.png|400px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#When you click OK, you will be taken to your object editor, where you will create the object that you need using all of the same tools in the Face Editor.
#[[File:Create new object in editor.PNG|400px]]
#When done, click '''Save'''. The custom object you've created is now is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Library Manager. 

==Saving an object to your Personal Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout, graphic, masking, exclusion of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, right-click and select '''Add to Library'''
[[File:Add cutout to library.png|400px]] 
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, right-click and select '''Group'''. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' in the right-hand. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:Edit new library item.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', '''Link''' and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the Personal tab of the Library Manager. 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a custom cutout to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Personal library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Library Manager
#From the '''Personal''' tab, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload''' button.
#[[File:Upload to online library.png]]
#The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Upload to library information.PNG|400px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Enter your email address (and you can opt to remember that email for future uploads.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:54:17Z

Amacdonald: /* Contributing a cutout design to the online library */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]] 
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a New Item in Your Personal Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, select the Personal tab and click the '''New Item''' button.
#:[[File:Create new item from library manager.png|300px]]
#The New Library Item dialog opens.
#[[File:New library item.png|400px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#When you click OK, you will be taken to your object editor, where you will create the object that you need using all of the same tools in the Face Editor.
#[[File:Create new object in editor.PNG|400px]]
#When done, click '''Save'''. The custom object you've created is now is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Library Manager. 

==Saving an object to your Personal Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout, graphic, masking, exclusion of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, right-click and select '''Add to Library'''
[[File:Add cutout to library.png|400px]] 
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, right-click and select '''Group'''. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' in the right-hand. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:Edit new library item.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', '''Link''' and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the Personal tab of the Library Manager. 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a custom cutout to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Personal library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Library Manager
#From the '''Personal''' tab, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload''' [[File:Upload to online library.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Upload to library information.PNG|400px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Enter your email address (and you can opt to remember that email for future uploads.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

File:Upload to library information.PNG

2023-05-05T13:52:03Z

Amacdonald:

File:Upload to online library.png

2023-05-05T13:51:44Z

Amacdonald:

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:48:23Z

Amacdonald: /* Saving an object to your Personal Library from the Face Editor */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]] 
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a New Item in Your Personal Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, select the Personal tab and click the '''New Item''' button.
#:[[File:Create new item from library manager.png|300px]]
#The New Library Item dialog opens.
#[[File:New library item.png|400px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#When you click OK, you will be taken to your object editor, where you will create the object that you need using all of the same tools in the Face Editor.
#[[File:Create new object in editor.PNG|400px]]
#When done, click '''Save'''. The custom object you've created is now is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Library Manager. 

==Saving an object to your Personal Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout, graphic, masking, exclusion of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, right-click and select '''Add to Library'''
[[File:Add cutout to library.png|400px]] 
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, right-click and select '''Group'''. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' in the right-hand. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:Edit new library item.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', '''Link''' and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the Personal tab of the Library Manager. 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

File:Edit new library item.png

2023-05-05T13:47:58Z

Amacdonald:

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:45:30Z

Amacdonald: /* Saving an object to your Personal Library from the Face Editor */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]] 
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a New Item in Your Personal Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, select the Personal tab and click the '''New Item''' button.
#:[[File:Create new item from library manager.png|300px]]
#The New Library Item dialog opens.
#[[File:New library item.png|400px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#When you click OK, you will be taken to your object editor, where you will create the object that you need using all of the same tools in the Face Editor.
#[[File:Create new object in editor.PNG|400px]]
#When done, click '''Save'''. The custom object you've created is now is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Library Manager. 

==Saving an object to your Personal Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout, graphic, masking, exclusion of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, right-click and select '''Add to Library'''
[[File:Add cutout to library.png|400px]] 
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, right-click and select '''Group'''. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' in the right-hand. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the Personal tab of the Library Manager. 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:43:04Z

Amacdonald: /* Saving an object to your Personal Library from the Face Editor */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]] 
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a New Item in Your Personal Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, select the Personal tab and click the '''New Item''' button.
#:[[File:Create new item from library manager.png|300px]]
#The New Library Item dialog opens.
#[[File:New library item.png|400px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#When you click OK, you will be taken to your object editor, where you will create the object that you need using all of the same tools in the Face Editor.
#[[File:Create new object in editor.PNG|400px]]
#When done, click '''Save'''. The custom object you've created is now is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Library Manager. 

==Saving an object to your Personal Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout, graphic, masking, exclusion of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, right-click and select '''Add to Library'''
[[File:Add cutout to library.png|400px]] 
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' button. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''x and y offsets''', '''Width''', '''Height''', '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the personal library section of the Cutout Library. 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

File:Add cutout to library.png

2023-05-05T13:41:55Z

Amacdonald:

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:41:23Z

Amacdonald: /* Saving a cutout to the Library from the Face Editor */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]] 
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a New Item in Your Personal Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, select the Personal tab and click the '''New Item''' button.
#:[[File:Create new item from library manager.png|300px]]
#The New Library Item dialog opens.
#[[File:New library item.png|400px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#When you click OK, you will be taken to your object editor, where you will create the object that you need using all of the same tools in the Face Editor.
#[[File:Create new object in editor.PNG|400px]]
#When done, click '''Save'''. The custom object you've created is now is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Library Manager. 

==Saving an object to your Personal Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout, graphic, masking, exclusion of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button and select the cutout.
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' button. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''x and y offsets''', '''Width''', '''Height''', '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the personal library section of the Cutout Library. 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:20:46Z

Amacdonald: /* Creating a New Item in Your Personal Library */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]] 
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a New Item in Your Personal Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, select the Personal tab and click the '''New Item''' button.
#:[[File:Create new item from library manager.png|300px]]
#The New Library Item dialog opens.
#[[File:New library item.png|400px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#When you click OK, you will be taken to your object editor, where you will create the object that you need using all of the same tools in the Face Editor.
#[[File:Create new object in editor.PNG|400px]]
#When done, click '''Save'''. The custom object you've created is now is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Library Manager. 

==Saving a cutout to the Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button and select the cutout.
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' button. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''x and y offsets''', '''Width''', '''Height''', '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the personal library section of the Cutout Library. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Cutout Library#Import DXF cutout files|Importing DXF cutout files]] 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

File:Create new object in editor.PNG

2023-05-05T13:18:25Z

Amacdonald:

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:16:09Z

Amacdonald: /* Creating a New Item in Your Personal Library */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]] 
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a New Item in Your Personal Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, select the Personal tab and click the '''New Item''' button.
#:[[File:Create new item from library manager.png|300px]]
#The New Library Item dialog opens.
#[[File:New library item.png|400px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#Click '''OK'''.
#Create the cutout in the editor that opens. When done, click '''Accept and Close'''. The cutout is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Library manager. 

==Saving a cutout to the Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button and select the cutout.
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' button. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''x and y offsets''', '''Width''', '''Height''', '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the personal library section of the Cutout Library. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Cutout Library#Import DXF cutout files|Importing DXF cutout files]] 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

File:New library item.png

2023-05-05T13:15:19Z

Amacdonald:

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:14:31Z

Amacdonald: /* Creating a cutout in the Library */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]] 
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a New Item in Your Personal Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, select the Personal tab and click the '''New Item''' button.
#:[[File:Create new item from library manager.png|300px]]
#The New Library Item dialog opens.
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#Click '''OK'''.
#Create the cutout in the editor that opens. When done, click '''Accept and Close'''. The cutout is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Cutout Library. 

==Saving a cutout to the Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button and select the cutout.
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' button. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''x and y offsets''', '''Width''', '''Height''', '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the personal library section of the Cutout Library. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Cutout Library#Import DXF cutout files|Importing DXF cutout files]] 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

File:Create new item from library manager.png

2023-05-05T13:14:08Z

Amacdonald:

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:11:49Z

Amacdonald: /* Managing Library Manager Items */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]] 
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a cutout in the Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, click the '''New Item''' button. The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:New_Library_item_NEW.png|300px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#Click '''OK'''.
#Create the cutout in the editor that opens. When done, click '''Accept and Close'''. The cutout is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Cutout Library. 

==Saving a cutout to the Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button and select the cutout.
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' button. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''x and y offsets''', '''Width''', '''Height''', '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the personal library section of the Cutout Library. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Cutout Library#Import DXF cutout files|Importing DXF cutout files]] 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:11:32Z

Amacdonald: /* Managing Library Manager Items */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library. 
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face.
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]]
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a cutout in the Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, click the '''New Item''' button. The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:New_Library_item_NEW.png|300px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#Click '''OK'''.
#Create the cutout in the editor that opens. When done, click '''Accept and Close'''. The cutout is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Cutout Library. 

==Saving a cutout to the Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button and select the cutout.
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' button. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''x and y offsets''', '''Width''', '''Height''', '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the personal library section of the Cutout Library. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Cutout Library#Import DXF cutout files|Importing DXF cutout files]] 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:11:20Z

Amacdonald: /* Managing Cutout Library items */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Library Manager Items==
 
When opening the Library Manager from the 3D View, you can create a copy for edit. This edited copy of the cutout will be saved in your Personal Library.
[[File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png|600px]] 
 
When using the Library Manager from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face.
[[File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png|600px]]
When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of object footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the object; when done, press <Esc>. 
[[File:Place item from library manager.png|300px]]

==Creating a cutout in the Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, click the '''New Item''' button. The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:New_Library_item_NEW.png|300px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#Click '''OK'''.
#Create the cutout in the editor that opens. When done, click '''Accept and Close'''. The cutout is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Cutout Library. 

==Saving a cutout to the Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button and select the cutout.
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' button. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''x and y offsets''', '''Width''', '''Height''', '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the personal library section of the Cutout Library. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Cutout Library#Import DXF cutout files|Importing DXF cutout files]] 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

File:Place item from library manager.png

2023-05-05T13:10:51Z

Amacdonald:

File:Managing cutout library items face editor.png

2023-05-05T13:09:43Z

Amacdonald:

File:Managing cutout library items 3D viewer.png

2023-05-05T13:06:52Z

Amacdonald:

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:04:36Z

Amacdonald: /* Opening the Library Manager */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Cutout Library items==
[[File:window-cutoutlibrary-db9a_NEW.png|600px]] 
When opening the Cutout Library from the 3D View, use the following buttons on the bottom:
:*'''New Item''': Draw a new item or group existing items. See '''[[Cutout_Library#Creating_a_cutout_in_the_Library | Creating a cutout in the Library]]''' below for detailed instructions.
:*'''New Category''': Create a new category for items in the '''personal library''' section. After clicking the button, enter the category Name. You can then move items (which also must be in the '''personal library''' section) into the new category by dragging them to the category name. All categories and items you add are also accessible from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu in the Face Editor.
:*'''Edit Item''': Edit any item in the '''personal library''' section. Click the item you want to edit, then click the '''Edit Item''' button, which opens the cutout in an editor similar to the Face Editor.
:*'''Update with New File''': Replace the selected cutout (in the '''personal library''') with a new file. The file you select must be a previously exported item.
:*'''Delete''': Click the '''personal library''' item you want to delete, then click the '''Delete''' button.
:*'''Load Item from File''': Add a .DXF, .PDC, .PDA, or .PDP file to the '''personal library''' section. 
:*'''Export to File''': Export the item to a .PDC file. This lets you export an item you want to alter and reload. It is also useful when sharing an item in your library with other people or computers, since the exported file can be opened in a different Designer installation.
:*'''Upload to Online Library''': Contribute a cutout in your personal library to the online library. Items uploaded to the online library will be downloaded and included in the your Designer library when you install a Designer update. See '''[[Cutout_Library#Contributing_a_cutout_design_to_the_online_library | Contributing a cutout design to the online library]]''' below for detailed instructions. 
When opening the Cutout Library from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also use:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the cutout; when done, press <Esc>. 

==Creating a cutout in the Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, click the '''New Item''' button. The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:New_Library_item_NEW.png|300px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#Click '''OK'''.
#Create the cutout in the editor that opens. When done, click '''Accept and Close'''. The cutout is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Cutout Library. 

==Saving a cutout to the Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button and select the cutout.
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' button. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''x and y offsets''', '''Width''', '''Height''', '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the personal library section of the Cutout Library. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Cutout Library#Import DXF cutout files|Importing DXF cutout files]] 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:04:20Z

Amacdonald: /* Opening the Library Manager */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Cutout Library items==
[[File:window-cutoutlibrary-db9a_NEW.png|600px]] 
When opening the Cutout Library from the 3D View, use the following buttons on the bottom:
:*'''New Item''': Draw a new item or group existing items. See '''[[Cutout_Library#Creating_a_cutout_in_the_Library | Creating a cutout in the Library]]''' below for detailed instructions.
:*'''New Category''': Create a new category for items in the '''personal library''' section. After clicking the button, enter the category Name. You can then move items (which also must be in the '''personal library''' section) into the new category by dragging them to the category name. All categories and items you add are also accessible from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu in the Face Editor.
:*'''Edit Item''': Edit any item in the '''personal library''' section. Click the item you want to edit, then click the '''Edit Item''' button, which opens the cutout in an editor similar to the Face Editor.
:*'''Update with New File''': Replace the selected cutout (in the '''personal library''') with a new file. The file you select must be a previously exported item.
:*'''Delete''': Click the '''personal library''' item you want to delete, then click the '''Delete''' button.
:*'''Load Item from File''': Add a .DXF, .PDC, .PDA, or .PDP file to the '''personal library''' section. 
:*'''Export to File''': Export the item to a .PDC file. This lets you export an item you want to alter and reload. It is also useful when sharing an item in your library with other people or computers, since the exported file can be opened in a different Designer installation.
:*'''Upload to Online Library''': Contribute a cutout in your personal library to the online library. Items uploaded to the online library will be downloaded and included in the your Designer library when you install a Designer update. See '''[[Cutout_Library#Contributing_a_cutout_design_to_the_online_library | Contributing a cutout design to the online library]]''' below for detailed instructions. 
When opening the Cutout Library from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also use:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the cutout; when done, press <Esc>. 

==Creating a cutout in the Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, click the '''New Item''' button. The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:New_Library_item_NEW.png|300px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#Click '''OK'''.
#Create the cutout in the editor that opens. When done, click '''Accept and Close'''. The cutout is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Cutout Library. 

==Saving a cutout to the Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button and select the cutout.
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' button. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''x and y offsets''', '''Width''', '''Height''', '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the personal library section of the Cutout Library. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Cutout Library#Import DXF cutout files|Importing DXF cutout files]] 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T13:04:03Z

Amacdonald: /* Opening the Library Manager */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Library Manager is organized into different categories of items, which are listed on each tab: Cutouts, Graphics, Hardware, Fasteners, Components and Personal. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
Click any tab to view its items, which are sorted into sub-folders; Double click the folder to view the items stored within it; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 
[[File:File:Library manager sub-folders.png|600px]] 
You can also use the search tab to find a specific item you need for your design. Note: You must pre-select the tab that you wish to search within. The search field does not search across all tabs.
[[File:Library manager search field.png|600px]] 

==Managing Cutout Library items==
[[File:window-cutoutlibrary-db9a_NEW.png|600px]] 
When opening the Cutout Library from the 3D View, use the following buttons on the bottom:
:*'''New Item''': Draw a new item or group existing items. See '''[[Cutout_Library#Creating_a_cutout_in_the_Library | Creating a cutout in the Library]]''' below for detailed instructions.
:*'''New Category''': Create a new category for items in the '''personal library''' section. After clicking the button, enter the category Name. You can then move items (which also must be in the '''personal library''' section) into the new category by dragging them to the category name. All categories and items you add are also accessible from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu in the Face Editor.
:*'''Edit Item''': Edit any item in the '''personal library''' section. Click the item you want to edit, then click the '''Edit Item''' button, which opens the cutout in an editor similar to the Face Editor.
:*'''Update with New File''': Replace the selected cutout (in the '''personal library''') with a new file. The file you select must be a previously exported item.
:*'''Delete''': Click the '''personal library''' item you want to delete, then click the '''Delete''' button.
:*'''Load Item from File''': Add a .DXF, .PDC, .PDA, or .PDP file to the '''personal library''' section. 
:*'''Export to File''': Export the item to a .PDC file. This lets you export an item you want to alter and reload. It is also useful when sharing an item in your library with other people or computers, since the exported file can be opened in a different Designer installation.
:*'''Upload to Online Library''': Contribute a cutout in your personal library to the online library. Items uploaded to the online library will be downloaded and included in the your Designer library when you install a Designer update. See '''[[Cutout_Library#Contributing_a_cutout_design_to_the_online_library | Contributing a cutout design to the online library]]''' below for detailed instructions. 
When opening the Cutout Library from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also use:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the cutout; when done, press <Esc>. 

==Creating a cutout in the Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, click the '''New Item''' button. The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:New_Library_item_NEW.png|300px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#Click '''OK'''.
#Create the cutout in the editor that opens. When done, click '''Accept and Close'''. The cutout is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Cutout Library. 

==Saving a cutout to the Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button and select the cutout.
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' button. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''x and y offsets''', '''Width''', '''Height''', '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the personal library section of the Cutout Library. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Cutout Library#Import DXF cutout files|Importing DXF cutout files]] 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

File:Library manager search field.png

2023-05-05T13:03:36Z

Amacdonald:

File:Library manager sub-folders.png

2023-05-05T13:00:51Z

Amacdonald:

File:Library manager tabs.png

2023-05-05T12:59:08Z

Amacdonald:

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T12:56:27Z

Amacdonald: /* Opening the Library Manager */

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go'''. 
[[File:Opening the Library Manager.png|600px]] 
The Cutout Library Manager lists the cutouts in two sections, '''main library''' and '''personal library'''. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
The main library section lists items by category. Click any category to view its items; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 

==Managing Cutout Library items==
[[File:window-cutoutlibrary-db9a_NEW.png|600px]] 
When opening the Cutout Library from the 3D View, use the following buttons on the bottom:
:*'''New Item''': Draw a new item or group existing items. See '''[[Cutout_Library#Creating_a_cutout_in_the_Library | Creating a cutout in the Library]]''' below for detailed instructions.
:*'''New Category''': Create a new category for items in the '''personal library''' section. After clicking the button, enter the category Name. You can then move items (which also must be in the '''personal library''' section) into the new category by dragging them to the category name. All categories and items you add are also accessible from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu in the Face Editor.
:*'''Edit Item''': Edit any item in the '''personal library''' section. Click the item you want to edit, then click the '''Edit Item''' button, which opens the cutout in an editor similar to the Face Editor.
:*'''Update with New File''': Replace the selected cutout (in the '''personal library''') with a new file. The file you select must be a previously exported item.
:*'''Delete''': Click the '''personal library''' item you want to delete, then click the '''Delete''' button.
:*'''Load Item from File''': Add a .DXF, .PDC, .PDA, or .PDP file to the '''personal library''' section. 
:*'''Export to File''': Export the item to a .PDC file. This lets you export an item you want to alter and reload. It is also useful when sharing an item in your library with other people or computers, since the exported file can be opened in a different Designer installation.
:*'''Upload to Online Library''': Contribute a cutout in your personal library to the online library. Items uploaded to the online library will be downloaded and included in the your Designer library when you install a Designer update. See '''[[Cutout_Library#Contributing_a_cutout_design_to_the_online_library | Contributing a cutout design to the online library]]''' below for detailed instructions. 
When opening the Cutout Library from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also use:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the cutout; when done, press <Esc>. 

==Creating a cutout in the Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, click the '''New Item''' button. The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:New_Library_item_NEW.png|300px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#Click '''OK'''.
#Create the cutout in the editor that opens. When done, click '''Accept and Close'''. The cutout is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Cutout Library. 

==Saving a cutout to the Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button and select the cutout.
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' button. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''x and y offsets''', '''Width''', '''Height''', '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the personal library section of the Cutout Library. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Cutout Library#Import DXF cutout files|Importing DXF cutout files]] 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

File:Opening the Library Manager.png

2023-05-05T12:56:09Z

Amacdonald:

Cutout Library

2023-05-05T12:30:33Z

Amacdonald:

==Library Manager Overview==
To get you started quickly in customizing your enclosure design, Protocase Designer includes a built-in library of common cutouts, graphics, fasteners, hardware and more. You can also use the library to create, edit, delete, organize, and place single or groups of cutouts on your enclosure. All cutouts are in the PDC (Protocase Designer Cutout) format. 
Protocase also offers a separate, online cutout library, which provides cutouts in DXF (Drawing Interchange Format, or Drawing Exchange Format) and SLDPRT (SolidWorks Part File) formats. You can download any cutout for free, and contribute custom cutouts of your own. You can also update the local Designer library from the online one. For more information on using the online library or to search it, see '''[[http://www.protocase.com/design/cutout-library/ Protocase online Cutout Library]]'''. 
The rest of this page contains information on the Designer cutout library, including how to contribute a design (that you have added to your Designer library) to the online library.

==Opening the Library Manager==
In both the 3D Viewer and the Face Editor, choose the type of object from the Library drop-down menu, then click '''Go''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''. 
[[File:Library_manager-3DView_NEW.png|600px]] 
The Cutout Library Manager lists the cutouts in two sections, '''main library''' and '''personal library'''. The cutouts you create (or modify) and save are automatically added to the personal library. This prevents the main library of stock cutouts from being changed, and also helps you find your own cutouts more easily. You can add, delete, or edit any item or category in the personal library, but not in the main library. 
The main library section lists items by category. Click any category to view its items; click any item to view it along with details such as its name, manufacturer, and part number. 

==Managing Cutout Library items==
[[File:window-cutoutlibrary-db9a_NEW.png|600px]] 
When opening the Cutout Library from the 3D View, use the following buttons on the bottom:
:*'''New Item''': Draw a new item or group existing items. See '''[[Cutout_Library#Creating_a_cutout_in_the_Library | Creating a cutout in the Library]]''' below for detailed instructions.
:*'''New Category''': Create a new category for items in the '''personal library''' section. After clicking the button, enter the category Name. You can then move items (which also must be in the '''personal library''' section) into the new category by dragging them to the category name. All categories and items you add are also accessible from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu in the Face Editor.
:*'''Edit Item''': Edit any item in the '''personal library''' section. Click the item you want to edit, then click the '''Edit Item''' button, which opens the cutout in an editor similar to the Face Editor.
:*'''Update with New File''': Replace the selected cutout (in the '''personal library''') with a new file. The file you select must be a previously exported item.
:*'''Delete''': Click the '''personal library''' item you want to delete, then click the '''Delete''' button.
:*'''Load Item from File''': Add a .DXF, .PDC, .PDA, or .PDP file to the '''personal library''' section. 
:*'''Export to File''': Export the item to a .PDC file. This lets you export an item you want to alter and reload. It is also useful when sharing an item in your library with other people or computers, since the exported file can be opened in a different Designer installation.
:*'''Upload to Online Library''': Contribute a cutout in your personal library to the online library. Items uploaded to the online library will be downloaded and included in the your Designer library when you install a Designer update. See '''[[Cutout_Library#Contributing_a_cutout_design_to_the_online_library | Contributing a cutout design to the online library]]''' below for detailed instructions. 
When opening the Cutout Library from the Face Editor ('''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library'''), you can also use:
:*'''Place Item''': Place the item onto the current face. When you click this button the Face Editor opens, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout footprint. Click in each location on the face where you wish to place the cutout; when done, press <Esc>. 

==Creating a cutout in the Library==
#:In the Library Manager window, click the '''New Item''' button. The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:New_Library_item_NEW.png|300px]]
#In '''Name''', enter a unique identifying name for the cutout.
#If you want to change the default origin (shown as a red dot), in '''Origin Placement''' click the dot that you want to be the origin. (It will turn red.)
#;'''Notes'''
#*The origin is the origin of the canvas, not just of the cutout on it.
#*Using the center as the origin makes it easiest to place objects; you will not need to use the grid because you can center objects on the origin.
#Enter the '''Height''' and '''Width''' of the cutout canvas. This is the area shown in green, on which the cutout is drawn. '''Tip''': Make each cutout canvas as large as the item that goes into the cutout, not just the hole it goes into, so that you can add an '''[[Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_drawing_mode | exclusion zone]]''' that fills the canvas around the cutout to prevent objects from being placed too closely.
#Click '''OK'''.
#Create the cutout in the editor that opens. When done, click '''Accept and Close'''. The cutout is added to the '''personal library''' section of the Cutout Library. 

==Saving a cutout to the Library from the Face Editor==
When you create a cutout of your own on a face, you can save it to the Cutout Library.
#After creating the cutout in the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button and select the cutout.
#If the cutout consists of more than one object, click the '''Group''' button in the Properties panel. '''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group.
#Click the '''Add to Library''' button. The Edit Properties dialog opens.
#;[[File:edit_properties_dialog_NEW.png|300px]] 
#Enter a new '''Name''' for the cutout. You can optionally add '''x and y offsets''', '''Width''', '''Height''', '''Manufacturer''', '''Part Number''', and '''Description'''.
#Click '''OK.''' The cutout is added to the personal library section of the Cutout Library. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Cutout Library#Import DXF cutout files|Importing DXF cutout files]] 

==Changing the origin of an existing cutout==
The best use of this procedure is after you group and/or merge items in the Face Editor and save them as a cutout, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up, and you might want to change the origin to make it more useful for placement.
#From the 3D View window, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', browse to find the item, and click to select it.
#Click the '''Edit Item''' button. The cutout is displayed in the Cutout Editor, with the origin shown as a blue circle with two axis arrows. In this example, we will move the origin in the Large Rackmount Handle from the center to the lower left.
#;[[File: change_origin_1.png|150px]]
#Click the origin and ''hold down the mouse button'' while you drag the cutout (and canvas) so that the origin is in the desired location. If you need to place the origin at an exact position, use the coordinates in the lower left corner of the screen as your reference while you drag the cutout. (The cutout moves around the origin, so you might need to pan and/or zoom to keep the image squarely in view.)
#;[[File: change_origin_2.png|100px]]
#Click the ‘’’Accept and Close’’’ button. 
'''Note''' In the above example, the origin has been placed in the lower left corner of the canvas, not of the slot cutout itself. Be sure to account for this, if necessary, when placing it on a face. Here is another example of the difference: 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of canvas:'' 
[[File: change_origin_3.png|200px]] 
''Cutout moved so that origin is in center of cutout:'' 
[[File: change_origin_4.png|200px]] 

==Contributing a cutout design to the online library==
Once you have added a cutout to your Designer library, you can contribute it to the online library as follows:
#Open the Cutout Library.
#From the '''personal library''' section, select the cutout you want to contribute.
#Click the '''Upload to Online Library''' [[File:Upload_to_Online_Library_button.png]] button. The Review Upload dialog opens:
#;[[File:Review_upload_dialog.png|500px]]
#Enter the:
#*'''Category''' (for example, PEMs, Connectors, Decorative, Fans, etc.)
#*'''Sub Category''' (for example, Screws, Nuts, Standoffs, and Studs are all subcategories of PEMs)
#*'''Link to Part on Manufacturer's Website'''
#*If you ''also'' want to contribute a Solidworks file for the same item, click the '''Browse''' button and select the file to contribute.
#Click the '''Submit''' button. 

==Importing DXF files==
Two-dimensional DXF files for cutouts, graphics, or groups of each can be imported into Protocase Designer directly into your design, or into your Cutout Library.

To import a dxf it must be an ascii dxf, not a binary dxf. This is usually an option in the dxf export for most software. It has been tested with autodesk version R12 and R14, as well as SolidWorks 2018.

Note that cutouts must be closed loops of continuous lines, and that splines are not supported. (The Protocase laser cuts only lines and circular arcs.) Since our implementation cannot cover every version of every software tool that makes DXF files, if you have trouble importing a DXF file, please send it to designer@protocase.com and state that you cannot import it into Protocase Designer, and if possible let us know what software package it was created in. 

'''How DXF Line Types are converted to Protocase Designer'''

Some DXF line types, upon import, are converted to Construct or Exclusion zones.

The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. Constructs, on the other hand, add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production, or impede where objects can be placed.

{|
|''DXF''||| ''Protocase Designer''
|-
| Continuous
|| Construct
|-
| By Layer
|| Construct
|-
| Center
|| Exclusion
|-
| CenterX2
|| Exclusion
|-
| Hidden
|| Construct
|-
| Dotted
|| Profile (a boundary that provides you with a point of reference, like a construct does)
|}

Read more about constructs [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Construct_object_type/ here] and exclusions [https://www.protocasedesigner.com/wiki/index.php?title=Face_Editor#Using_the_Exclusion_object_type/ here].

'''''To import a DXF file into a design'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CENTERX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#Load the assembly and select the face you want to add the cutout to.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Place Object From File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:If units of measure are not found in the file, you are prompted to select the unit ('''Inches''', '''MM''', or '''CM''').
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The Face Editor opens with the cutout displayed at the cursor location. Move it to the desired location on the face, and click to place it on the face with its origin at that point.

'''''To import a DXF file into your Cutout Library'''''
#If the DXF is that of a circuit board, first remove everything from the DXF file except the mounting holes and the board outline, and change the board outline to the Hidden or CenterX2 line type. (As noted above, in Designer the Hidden line type becomes a Construct, and the CenterX2 line type becomes an Exclusion.)
#From the 3D View, choose '''Cutout Library Manager''' > '''Open Cutout Manager''', or, from the Face Editor, choose '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' > '''Cutout Library Manager'''.
#Click '''Load Item from File'''.
#Browse to the DXF file, select it and click '''Open'''.
#:The New Library Item dialog opens, with the '''Keep Default Origin''' radio button selected.
#To accept the default, click '''OK.''' To change the default, select the '''Assign New Origin''' radio button, click the dot that you want to be the new origin, then click '''OK.'''
#:The cutout is added to your library and is displayed at the bottom of the cutout list.

3D View Window

2022-11-14T14:48:08Z

Amacdonald: /* Creating a new assembly */

=3D View Window overview=
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate. 
[[File:3D View Window 1 3D View Window Overview.PNG|800px]] 

==3D Standard Toolbar==
[[File:3D View Window 2 3D Standard toolbar.PNG]] 
The 3D Viewer has a standard toolbar with different tabs: File, View, Help, Admin.

The functions within the File tab are as follows:

| '''New'''
| Create a new assembly.
 

| '''Open'''
| Open a Protocase Designer Assembly you've previously created.
 

| '''Save'''
| Save the assembly you're working on.
 

| '''Save As'''
| Save the assembly in a specific location.
 

| '''Preferences'''
| Change your settings and preferences.
 

| '''Sub-Assembly'''
| Create a sub-assembly for your Protocase Designer assembly.
 

| '''Export'''
| Export your design as a STEP file (.STEP).
 

| '''Properties'''
| Change the properties for the template from which you started your Protocase Designer Assembly, including metal type, thickness, finish, hardware and more.
 

| '''Transfer'''
| Transfer your design to a new enclosure template style.
 

| '''Move'''
| Move your Protocase Designer Assembly in the 3D Viewer.
 

| '''Edit Face'''
| Edit a selected face of your Protocase Designer Assembly.
 

| '''Check Design'''
| Check your design for manufacturabilty warnings and errors.
 
[[File:3D View Window Standard Toolbar View Tab.PNG]] 

The functions within the View tab are as follows:

| '''Rotate'''
| Rotate your Protocase Designer Assembly.
 

| '''Pan'''
| Move the model around the plane of the viewport.
 

| '''Preset Views'''
| Use the drop-down menu to change your model to a select view: Isometric, Front, Right, Top, Left, Bottom, Rear. Note: You can also use the View Selector Box at the bottom right of the 3D Viewer to change your view to a select face.
 

| '''Reset'''
| Reset the view of your model to the starting view.
 

| '''Bent View'''
| Display the model as it would look after the bending process in manufacturing.
 

| '''Flat View'''
| Display the model as it would look prior to the bending process in manufacturing.
 

| '''Part Tree'''
| View a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure.
 

| '''Print'''
| Print views of each face of your model.
 

| '''Explode'''
| Use the slider to create an exploded view of your model. The higher the number on the slider, the more exploded your view will be.
 

==3D View Preferences==
If you want to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]]. 

=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=

==Creating a new assembly==
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' > '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens.
[[File:Start with a Template PD Nov 10 2022.PNG|300px]]
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly.
#;[[File:32XANM~Q.PNG|500px]]
#Certain templates must be downloaded before they can be selected. Press the download button to download the template you require.
#;[[File:Download required.PNG|500px]]
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details.
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions.
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.
#;[[File:3D View Window 5 Click ok to view the 3D model.PNG|500px]] 
====Opening an existing assembly====
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.
#Select the file you want to open.
====Saving an assembly====
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.)
#Choose '''File''' > '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.

====Saving a copy of an assembly====
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''. 

=Changing assembly properties=
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type.
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.
#;[[File:3D View Window 6 Changing Assembly Properties.PNG|450px]]
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead).
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''. 
'''Note''' 
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.

===Transferring an enclosure design===
#Open the design that you want to transfer.
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' > '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''.
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed.
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.
#Click '''OK'''.
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a "front panel," whereas a 1U Extruded has a "front plate," whereas a U Shape has just a "front"), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose "Drop This Face" as necessary.
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen.
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design).
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually. 

=Viewing the model=
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.
 
==Rotating==
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate.PNG]] button in the Standard toolbar.
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.

==Panning==
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:
*Right-click the model and drag it. 
*Press and hold down the <Alt> key, then click and drag the model. 
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan.PNG]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.

==Zooming==
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward. 
'''Notes'''
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location. 
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu. 

==Toggle flat/bent view==
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following: 
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' > '''Toggle Flat'''.
[[File:Bent View and Flat View.PNG‎]]

==Reset view==
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset.PNG|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu. 

=Editing a face=
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.
 
To open the Face Editor:
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:Edit Face.PNG|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens. 

=Viewing the Part Tree=
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree. 
[[File:3D View Window 9 Part Tree Icon PNG.png|500px]]

==Navigate the Part Tree==
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.
[[File:3D View Window 10 Viewing the Part Tree.PNG|500px]]

==Change object name and description==
#Click an object name on the left.
#Type a new name or description on the right.

==Add/Delete notes==
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support
such as "Please scrub this with a scouring pad". You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase Designer but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note "Add 6-32 x 3/8" standoff here".
#Click an object name on the left.
#Do one of the following:
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.
#Click the arrows to view each note.
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.

==Editing a face from the Part Tree==
#Click a face name on the left.
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.
#:[[File:3D View Window 11 Editing a Face from the Part Tree.PNG|500px]]
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.

==Exporting an IGES file==
You can export your PDA file into an IGES file, allowing you to import your project into other CAD software. 
This IGES export feature is currently only compatible with the 2018 release of Solidworks (as well as NX).
#Open the existing PDA file that you saved from the Protocase Designer software
#Select the '''Export Menu''', and in the drop down, click '''Export Assembly to IGES'''. '''Note:''' Depending on the complexity of your design, the software could take a considerable amount of time to export the file, as it must export each feature individually.
#Once the export is completed, you can now open your exported IGES file in various CAD software.

'''Note:''' In order to import your IGES file into SolidWorks 2018, the Enable 3D Interconnect setting must be enabled. This can be found under Tools->Options->Import->General.
 Also, this is currently only intended as a means of archiving your projects. We are working on improvements to this functionality to increase the usability of the exported file.
 This will be released in a future version of Designer.

View full video tutorial here: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Fdyi_QXU7M0

==Exporting a STEP File==

You can export your Protocase Designer Assembly as a STEP file, allowing you to import your project into other CAD software.

To export your file:
#Open your existing PDA file saved in the Protocase Designer software.
#Select the "Export Assembly to IGES" option under the Export Menu in the tool bar at the top of your screen.
#The software will process your request. The time that this step will take depends on the complexity of your design.
#Once the export is completed, open your other CAD software and select your design.

Note: We support AP203 and AP214 STEP Application protocols.

File:Download required.PNG

2022-11-14T14:47:55Z

Amacdonald:

3D View Window

2022-11-10T19:16:29Z

Amacdonald: /* Creating a new assembly */

=3D View Window overview=
The 3D View window displays a 3D model of your enclosure that you can manipulate. 
[[File:3D View Window 1 3D View Window Overview.PNG|800px]] 

==3D Standard Toolbar==
[[File:3D View Window 2 3D Standard toolbar.PNG]] 
The 3D Viewer has a standard toolbar with different tabs: File, View, Help, Admin.

The functions within the File tab are as follows:

| '''New'''
| Create a new assembly.
 

| '''Open'''
| Open a Protocase Designer Assembly you've previously created.
 

| '''Save'''
| Save the assembly you're working on.
 

| '''Save As'''
| Save the assembly in a specific location.
 

| '''Preferences'''
| Change your settings and preferences.
 

| '''Sub-Assembly'''
| Create a sub-assembly for your Protocase Designer assembly.
 

| '''Export'''
| Export your design as a STEP file (.STEP).
 

| '''Properties'''
| Change the properties for the template from which you started your Protocase Designer Assembly, including metal type, thickness, finish, hardware and more.
 

| '''Transfer'''
| Transfer your design to a new enclosure template style.
 

| '''Move'''
| Move your Protocase Designer Assembly in the 3D Viewer.
 

| '''Edit Face'''
| Edit a selected face of your Protocase Designer Assembly.
 

| '''Check Design'''
| Check your design for manufacturabilty warnings and errors.
 
[[File:3D View Window Standard Toolbar View Tab.PNG]] 

The functions within the View tab are as follows:

| '''Rotate'''
| Rotate your Protocase Designer Assembly.
 

| '''Pan'''
| Move the model around the plane of the viewport.
 

| '''Preset Views'''
| Use the drop-down menu to change your model to a select view: Isometric, Front, Right, Top, Left, Bottom, Rear. Note: You can also use the View Selector Box at the bottom right of the 3D Viewer to change your view to a select face.
 

| '''Reset'''
| Reset the view of your model to the starting view.
 

| '''Bent View'''
| Display the model as it would look after the bending process in manufacturing.
 

| '''Flat View'''
| Display the model as it would look prior to the bending process in manufacturing.
 

| '''Part Tree'''
| View a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure.
 

| '''Print'''
| Print views of each face of your model.
 

| '''Explode'''
| Use the slider to create an exploded view of your model. The higher the number on the slider, the more exploded your view will be.
 

==3D View Preferences==
If you want to use a different unit of measure or have other preferences when using Designer, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]]. 

=Creating, opening, and saving assembly files=

==Creating a new assembly==
#Click the '''New File''' button in the Pick An Option To Start window, choose '''File''' > '''New''', or click the '''Make New Enclosure From Template''' button in the 3D Standard toolbar. The New Assembly dialog opens.
[[File:Start with a Template PD Nov 10 2022.PNG|300px]]
#Select an assembly category on the left and then select an assembly.
#;[[File:32XANM~Q.PNG|500px]]
#Modify the assembly parameters including size, thickness, material, and colour to meet your design requirements, conforming to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the window. See '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_enclosure_properties|Changing enclosure properties]]''' below for details.
#*'''Note''': To create a custom bracket with cutouts and other elements, you use the 3D View window to create it, then you use the Face Editor to customize it and to add it to a face. See '''[[Face Editor#Creating and adding brackets|Creating and adding brackets]]''' for step-by-step instructions.
#Click '''OK''' to view the 3D model.
#;[[File:3D View Window 5 Click ok to view the 3D model.PNG|500px]] 
====Opening an existing assembly====
#In the 3D View window, choose '''Open''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Open''' button in the Standard toolbar.
#Select the file you want to open.
====Saving an assembly====
Files are saved in .PDA (Protocase Designer) format. (Note that you cannot save the enclosure design as a modified template; you can only save the enclosure design.)
#Choose '''File''' > '''Save''' or click the '''Save''' button in the Standard toolbar.
#If this is the first time the assembly is being saved, the Save dialog box opens. Select a location and enter a name for the file, then click '''Save'''.

====Saving a copy of an assembly====
#Choose '''Save As''' from the '''File''' menu, or click the '''Save As''' button in the Standard toolbar.
#In the Save dialog box that opens, select a location to save the file and enter a new name for the assembly, then click '''Save'''. 

=Changing assembly properties=
At any point after you create a new assembly (enclosure, bracket, or panel) you can modify its properties such as size, thickness, material, colour, and screw type.
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Edit Enclosure Properties'''. The Edit Assembly dialog is displayed.
#;[[File:3D View Window 6 Changing Assembly Properties.PNG|450px]]
#Change any of the enclosure properties, being sure to conform to any Manufacturing Constraints if they are listed at the bottom of the dialog.
#If the template includes screws, the '''Screw Type''' is displayed with a default value. (Brackets and panels do not use screws.) To change the default screw, click the '''Screw Type''' down-arrow and choose the color (Black, Natural [Zinc], or Stainless) and type (Flathead or Panhead).
#To save the modifications, click '''OK'''. 
'''Note''' 
:*When you select a rackmount enclosure template, the parameters include the '''Full Height Chassis''' check box. Selecting this checkbox causes the screws to be countersunk, and the enclosure the same height as the front of the rackmount.

===Transferring an enclosure design===
#Open the design that you want to transfer.
#In the 3D View, choose '''File''' > '''Transfer to New Enclosure'''.
#In the Transfer Design to New Assembly dialog that opens, select the new enclosure and modify parameters as needed.
#:Designer will transfer parameters for enclosures of the same category; for example, if you are transferring between two types of Extruded enclosures, nothing needs to be changed. However, if you are transferring from a U Shape to a Rackmount, you may need to change some parameters manually.
#Click '''OK'''.
#:An untitled dialog opens, in which the face names of the original enclosure are listed on the left, and to the right of each name is a column of potential face names for the new enclosure. When the two designs use different names for a face (for example, a Rackmount has a "front panel," whereas a 1U Extruded has a "front plate," whereas a U Shape has just a "front"), select the appropriate face name for the new design. Many of these are pre-selected, but check them all and change the name or choose "Drop This Face" as necessary.
#:'''Tip''' If you are unsure of a face name for an enclosure, you can check by loading the enclosure and viewing the face in the Face Editor. The face name is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Face Editor screen.
#Click '''OK''' when done (or '''Cancel''' to abandon the new enclosure template and return to your original design).
#Check each element of the new design against your original. For some transfers, the cutouts may need to be flipped or moved manually. 

=Viewing the model=
There are several controls to allow viewing and manipulating the 3D model of your enclosure.
 
==Rotating==
The '''Rotate''' command rotates the model around its center.
#Click the '''Rotate''' [[File:Rotate.PNG]] button in the Standard toolbar.
#Drag the model to rotate it to the desired orientation.

==Panning==
To move the model around the plane of the viewport, do any of the following:
*Right-click the model and drag it. 
*Press and hold down the <Alt> key, then click and drag the model. 
*Click the '''Pan''' [[File:Pan.PNG]] button in the Standard toolbar, then click and drag the model.

==Zooming==
To zoom the model in or out, rotate the wheel button forward or backward. 
'''Notes'''
*The model zooms in/out from the centre of the viewport, regardless of the pointer location. 
*If your pointing device does not have a wheel, open the Face Editor and use the '''Zoom In''' and '''Zoom Out''' buttons in the Standard toolbar or the '''Zoom''' commands in the '''View''' menu. 

==Toggle flat/bent view==
The Toggle Flat and Bent commands displays the enclosure parts as they are laid out prior to the bending process during manufacturing. These commands are for reference only, and do not affect the manufacturing of the final enclosure. You can do either of the following: 
*To display the model in a flat view, click the '''Flat''' button in the Standard toolbar. To display the model in the bent view, click the '''Bent''' button. By default, the model is displayed in the bent view.
*You can also change between the two views by choosing '''View''' > '''Toggle Flat'''.
[[File:Bent View and Flat View.PNG‎]]

==Reset view==
The Reset View command displays the model in the center of the viewport in its original orientation.
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Reset.PNG|text-bottom]] in the Standard toolbar, or choose '''Reset View''' from the '''View''' menu. 

=Editing a face=
You use the Face Editor to add cutouts, graphics, exclusion zones, masking, and construction lines to a face.
 
To open the Face Editor:
#Rotate the model to show the face you want to edit.
#Click the '''Edit Face''' button. [[File:Edit Face.PNG|bottom]]. The pointer will change to a crosshair.
#Click a face to edit. The [[Face Editor|Face Editor window]] opens. 

=Viewing the Part Tree=
The Part Tree shows a hierarchical list of all the faces and objects in your enclosure. You can change the name and description of objects as well as open a face in the Face Editor Window directly from the Part Tree. 
[[File:3D View Window 9 Part Tree Icon PNG.png|500px]]

==Navigate the Part Tree==
#Click the icon to the left of a face to display the objects on that face below.
#Click an object name to display description, and notes on the right of the Part Tree window.
[[File:3D View Window 10 Viewing the Part Tree.PNG|500px]]

==Change object name and description==
#Click an object name on the left.
#Type a new name or description on the right.

==Add/Delete notes==
You can add notes to parts, faces, and objects for your own reference or to provide additional information to technical support
such as "Please scrub this with a scouring pad". You can also use it to place features that might not be permitted in Protocase Designer but can be manufactured with certain restrictions. For example, you could create a circle using construction lines near the edge of a face on the exclusion zone (where you wouldn't normally be able to place a self-clinching standoff) and add a note "Add 6-32 x 3/8" standoff here".
#Click an object name on the left.
#Do one of the following:
#*If there are no notes, type a note in the notes field.
#*If there are existing notes, click '''New Note''' and type a note in the notes field.
#Click the arrows to view each note.
#Click '''Delete Note''' to delete the currently displayed note.

==Editing a face from the Part Tree==
#Click a face name on the left.
#Click '''Edit Face'''. The '''Face Editor''' window opens.
#:[[File:3D View Window 11 Editing a Face from the Part Tree.PNG|500px]]
'''Note''': The Part Tree window can also be accessed from the Face Editor.

==Exporting an IGES file==
You can export your PDA file into an IGES file, allowing you to import your project into other CAD software. 
This IGES export feature is currently only compatible with the 2018 release of Solidworks (as well as NX).
#Open the existing PDA file that you saved from the Protocase Designer software
#Select the '''Export Menu''', and in the drop down, click '''Export Assembly to IGES'''. '''Note:''' Depending on the complexity of your design, the software could take a considerable amount of time to export the file, as it must export each feature individually.
#Once the export is completed, you can now open your exported IGES file in various CAD software.

'''Note:''' In order to import your IGES file into SolidWorks 2018, the Enable 3D Interconnect setting must be enabled. This can be found under Tools->Options->Import->General.
 Also, this is currently only intended as a means of archiving your projects. We are working on improvements to this functionality to increase the usability of the exported file.
 This will be released in a future version of Designer.

View full video tutorial here: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Fdyi_QXU7M0

==Exporting a STEP File==

You can export your Protocase Designer Assembly as a STEP file, allowing you to import your project into other CAD software.

To export your file:
#Open your existing PDA file saved in the Protocase Designer software.
#Select the "Export Assembly to IGES" option under the Export Menu in the tool bar at the top of your screen.
#The software will process your request. The time that this step will take depends on the complexity of your design.
#Once the export is completed, open your other CAD software and select your design.

Note: We support AP203 and AP214 STEP Application protocols.

File:Start with a Template PD Nov 10 2022.PNG

2022-11-10T19:15:53Z

Amacdonald:

Face Editor

2022-05-31T14:17:26Z

Amacdonald: /* Quick Search */

=Face Editor overview=
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.

[[File:Face Editor 1 Face Editor Overview.PNG|1000px|Face Editor Window]] 

[[File:Face Editor 2 Design Toolbar.PNG]] 

;2D Design bar
:Contains Cutout, Graphic, Masking, Reference and Exclusion, with the common drawing types (circle, ellipse, rectangle, path, line, arc, etc).

;2D Tools Bar
:Contains common tools such as move, trim, pattern, measure, dimension, coordinates.

===Face Editor preferences===
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]] in the 3D Viewer. 

=Viewing the face=

Click the View tab in the toolbar to see all of your viewing options.

[[File:View Toolbar.PNG]]

==Zooming==
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following.
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Face Editor Zoom In.PNG|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Face Editor Zoom Out.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.
:*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' > '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom. 
*To zoom in on a particular area:
*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom. 

==Resetting the view==
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Face Editor Reset View.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.
*Choose '''View''' > '''Reset View'''. 

==Viewing the front or back of the face==
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, click '''Back'' in the View Tab. 
[[File:Viewing the Front or the Back of the face front and back.PNG|200px]] 

=Coordinate System=
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.

[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]] 

===Choosing the Units of Measure===

You can set the default unit of measure.

#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM).
#Click '''OK.''' 

=Quick Search=
Instead of using the Library Manager to find the specific item you want to place, you can use the Quick Search tab to quickly find and place an item from our Library. 
[[File:Quick Search initial screen.PNG|800px]]
*Use the drop-down menu to search for the item you're looking for. Be as specific as possible.
[[File:Quick Search finding fastener.PNG|800px]]
*Select the item and click the button labelled 'Place Item'.
[[File:Quick Search Place Item.PNG|800px]]
*This tool can be especially useful for finding a specific fastener you need, by searching the part number.
 

=Drawing shapes=

==Selecting the drawing (object) type==
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''. 
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the "Mode" label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''. 
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]] 
 

===Using the Cutout object type===
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]] 

===Using the Graphic object type===
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.

====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press <Enter>. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.).
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is "None"; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads.
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish.
:*The printed area must be no more than 46"x46", and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24" high.
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed. 

=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Preferences'''.
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to "Graphic" for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.)
#Click '''OK'''. 

=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change.
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu.
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]] 

===Using the Exclusion object type===
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.

===Using the Masking object type===
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust. 
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked. 
'''Notes''' 
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1". 

===Using the Construct object type===
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production. 

==Drawing circles==
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing ellipses==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing rectangles and squares==
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing custom paths==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape. 

====Creating an arc using the Path tool====
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment).
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press <a>.
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer.
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size.
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing <A>).
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.) 

====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.

'''''To merge two or more objects'''''
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object.
#:[[File:Merge two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.)
#:[[File:Merge Select Objects.PNG]]
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu.
#:[[File:Merge Right Click and choose Merge.PNG]]
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout.
#:[[File:Merged into single cutout.PNG]] 
'''''To edit a merged object''''' 
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.
:[[File:Edit a Merged Object.PNG]] [[File:Merge move node of object.PNG]] 
'''Note''' If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. 
'''''To trim two or more objects''''' 
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.
#Place a circle on the face.
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it.
#:[[File:Trim two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.
#:[[File:Trim Select both objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Trim''' button.
#:[[File:Trim button.PNG]]
#:The outline of each object is outlined.
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]
#Use your cursor to eliminate the lines you do not want.
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode. '''Important!''' If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved. 
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such.
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]] 
'''See Also: '''
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]

====Solving problems with merging objects====
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.
 
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom: 
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]] 
If you then merge them and click <Esc>, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view.
 
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic.
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle.
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well.
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]
#When completed, click the <Esc> key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly. 

==Drawing lines==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.
#Drag to set the end of the line.
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing arcs==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc.
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc.
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc.
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Adding text==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.
#Click on the face and begin typing.
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''<Enter>''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time.
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''', and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''. 

====Adding special characters====
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.

There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.

If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows.
#Copy the character.
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:
#;[[File:Adding special characters.PNG|border|500px]]
#:'''Tip''' The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:
#;[[File:Registered trademark symbol text field of its own.PNG|500px]] 

'''See Also''' 
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]''' 

==Adding images==
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed. 
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/ '''Spotting the Difference''']. 
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed.
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.)
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received.
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves.
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.
'''Notes''': 
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit->Preferences->Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer.
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins.
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text->Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the "ghost" image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as "Plain SVG". This should allow the SVG image to import.
 
====Exporting images====
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export.
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens.
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. 

==Importing fonts==
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.
#Select '''Import font'''.
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.
'''Notes''':
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it.
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts.
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''

=Using the Measure tool=
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]] 

==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool initial selection of objects.PNG|600px]] 
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Move''' tool or press <Esc>. 

==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.
#Click the centre of the circle cutout.
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500px]]
#Enter "5" in '''x difference''' and "-3" in '''y difference'''.
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)
 

==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500 px]]
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of "1" and an '''x difference''' of "1".
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel. 

==Displaying measurements==
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes. 
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points''''' 
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Dimension Button.PNG|75px|bottom]]
#:The distance of "0.000" is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint.
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor.
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed.
#:[[File:Measure and display the distance between two points actual.PNG|500px]]
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green.
#:[[File:Green circle drawn around the snap-to point.PNG||500px]]
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:
#::The distance between the two points;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure.
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed. The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle.
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse.
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way.
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - 0 position.PNG|500px]]
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - near object.PNG|500px]]
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - snap point.PNG|500px]] 

'''''To delete a displayed measurement''''' 
Do either of the following:
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu.
*Highlight the line and press the <Delete> key. 

=Using the grid=
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects. 

Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel.

===Turn on/off the Grid===
#In the View tab, go the Grid section
#[[File:Snap to Grid.PNG|200px]]
#*Click the Show checkbox to show the Grid.
[[File:Turn on-off the grid Show grid.PNG|600px]]

===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===
#To have your objects snap to the Grid:
#*Click the Snap checkbox 

===Changing grid size and offset===
#On the View tab of the toolbar, click the Size icon [[File:Changing Grid Size icon.PNG|bottom]] in the Grid section.
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:
:[[File:Changing Grid Size.PNG|300px]]
 
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}
[[File:Grid with 1 in width and height, 1 in offset width and offset height.PNG|500px]]
 

=Managing object properties=

[[File:Top of Properties Panel.PNG|thumb|Properties panel view]]

[[File:Object Type needs to be called Path Type.PNG|thumb]]

===Top of Properties Panel===
[[File:Top of Properties Panel A.PNG]]
* The Properties Panel has the following tabs: Properties, Notes, Layers, Mode Help

*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.

===Fill===
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.

===Line Thickness===
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.

===Color===
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu.

===Type===
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.
* Object types include:
:Cutout
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)
:Exclusion
:Construct

===Origin===
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:
:'''Circles''' -- centre
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner
:'''Paths''' -- start point
:'''Lines''' -- start point
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner 
'''See Also''' 
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]

===Circles===
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.
===Ellipses===
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).
===Rectangles===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Lines===
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.
===Images===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Text===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.

===Path===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise 

==Adding notes==
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering & Design Services team. For example:
* "Notch in this bend."
* "Put a hinged door over this cutout."
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering & Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering & Design Services will give you the correct quote. 
'''''To add a note to an object'''''
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note.
#Go to the Notes tab in the Properties Panel to create a new note. Click the Green + Button to create a new note.
#;[[File:Notes Tab.PNG|500px]]
#;Enter your note, then click OK.
#;[[File:Add New Note.PNG|500px]]
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time. 
'''''To add a general note'''''
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' button.
#;[[File:To add a general note.PNG|500px]]
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it. 
'''''To delete a note'''''
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button. 
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View > View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance.
#:[[File:Review All notes.PNG|500 px]]
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected. 

=Adding cutouts=
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure. 
'''See Also:''' 
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]] 

===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutouts''' from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#;[[File:Cutout Library.PNG|150px]]
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description.
#;[[File:Adding a cutout by browsing the cutout library.PNG|500px]]
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout.
#;[[File:Click the Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.
#;[[File:Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process. 

==Adding "D" port cutouts==
You can add a "D"-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel.
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it.
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]] 

==Adding a circular gauge==
You can add a circular gauge graphic, which is a circle or arc shape with numbered notches, according to your requirements.
#In the Face Editor, choose ''' Place Circular Gauge ''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it.
#Once the circular gauge is placed, click ''' Move Item ''' or press Escape so that your circular gauge is selected.
#You can customize the circular gauge to your requirements, including color, line thickness, number of ticks, angle, label and more.

=Adding hardware=
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles.

==Adding self-clinching fasteners==
Protocase uses PEM® brand self-clinching fasteners.
#In the Face Editor, choose Fasteners from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#:[[File:Adding Self Clinching Fasteners.PNG|300px]]
#:The Fasteners section of the Library Manager opens.
#:[[File:Library Manager self clinching fasteners.PNG|500px]]
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)
#Select the thread '''Length'''.
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed.
#Select a '''Part Number'''.
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature. 
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with "ZI".) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones.
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.
#:Place the fastener on the face.
#:[[File:Self Clinching Fastener Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Move''' button or press the '''Esc''' key.
#:[[File:Self clinching fasteners in 3D viewer.PNG|500px]] 
'''See Also''': 
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']] 

==Adding hardware such as handles==
#In the '''Library''' drop-down menu, click '''Hardware'''
#:[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px]]
#Browse the hardware items to find the item you need.
#:[[File:Library Manager Hardware.PNG|500px]]
#Select the hardware item you want to use, and click '''Place This Item'''
#Place item on the face where you want it.
#Click Save to view your design in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:Hardware Handles 3D viewer.PNG|500px]]

==Adding Rubber Feet==
#On the Library drop-down menu in the right corner, select Hardware and click '''GO'''.
#;[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px|]]
#Choose the folder labelled '''Rubber Feet'''. Select the rubber foot you require: Large Rubber Foot, Medium Rubber Foot, Small Rubber Foot or Tapered (which is attached via adhesive).
#;[[File:Library Manager Rubber Feet.PNG|600px|]]
#Click '''Place This Item''' to place the rubber foot in your desired location.
#In order to have a stable enclosure, you will then need to place the same rubber foot in the other three corners of your enclosure.
#;[[File:Rubber Feet Placed in Face Editor.PNG|600px|]]
#The Protocase Engineering team recommends placing each rubber foot at least 0.5 or 1 inch away from the edges of your enclosure. If your enclosure is very large, you may go even farther from the edge if required.
#;[[File:Medium Rubber feet in 3D viewer.PNG|600px|]]

==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==
====Adding a countersink to a face====
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole.
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Adding a countersink to a face.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of "100.0° #2" indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.
#;[[File:Countersink Metal Thickness.PNG|600px]]
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png|200px]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera. 

====Adding a tapped hole to a face====
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole.
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Tapped Hole.PNG|500px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of "2-56 [0.07]" indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07" for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.)
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face. 
#:[[File:Tapped Hole solid circle with partial circle around it.PNG]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.
 

====Adding screws to a face====
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''.
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener. 

====Replacing screws and PEMs====
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the fastener. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it.
#Right-click and select '''Replace PEMs''' from the menu that displays.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs right click.PNG|300px]]
#The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the fastener you wish to use, and then click the '''Place This Item'' to select this fastener instead of the existing one.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs choose new fastener.PNG|600px]]

==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure. 
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''
#Click '''New'''.
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens.
#:[[File:Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly click new.PNG|250 px]]
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary.
#:[[File:Choose the bracket you want to customize.PNG|600 px]]
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button.
#:The 3D View window opens.
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the left hand panel.
#You will be prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure).
#:The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:Sub-assembly dialog.PNG|500 px]]
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is "L Bracket by Base - Bottom". ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''
#:'''Part Number'''
#:'''Description'''
#Click '''OK.'''
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu. 
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face. 

'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure.
#Click the '''Place Item''' button.
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon.
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.
#Specify how you would like your sub-assembly attached: '''welding, self-clinching fasteners or other'''.
#Whether you choose welding or self-clinching fasteners, please provide as many specific details as you can. (Ex: specify the type of welding you would like, such as tack weld, plug weld, etc).
# For self-clinching fasteners, please provide as much detail as to what fastener you would like used. Ex: nuts, studs or standoffs. Include all of the key information, including part number, thread size and length. If you do not have a specific preference, please advise our Engineering & Design Services team that they may choose the most logical option.
#Choose "other" if you'd prefer to attach your sub-assembly yourself once you receive the completed order.
#'''Note''': Once you order your design, our Engineering & Design Services team may contact you if they require more information or need to clarify details.
#View video tutorial about sub-assemblies: https://youtu.be/XciURDevnXA
 

=Adding Graphics from the Graphics Library=

The Graphics Library allows you to place common symbols and graphics, such as USB, Electrical Ground and Caution.
#Once in the Face Editor, you can access the Library by selecting Graphics from the drop-down Library menu in the top corner.
#[[File:Graphics from Graphics Library.PNG|400px]]
#The Graphics library is organized by category: Electronic Symbols, Flags, Marks, Warning & Caution Symbols and Other. Click on the Category to expand the list and see all of the graphic symbols available.
#[[File:Library manager Graphics Library.PNG|600px]]
#Once you’ve found the graphic symbol you want to place on your design, click the symbol name and then click Place This Item. Resize and relocate the graphics symbol, just as you would with any other object.

Note: You can also change the color of your symbol, so long as the symbol you’ve placed is only one color in nature. (Any symbol that is more than one color, such as Electrostatic Sensitivity, Laser, Pacemaker and Two Person Lift, cannot be altered with different colors. Flag graphics' colors also cannot be changed).

=Adding Components from Library=
Protocase Designer's Library Manager includes a tab for Components, where you can quickly and easily download boards, connectors, drives, fans, heatsinks, LCD screens and power supplies, and then place on you rdesign.

==Add Components from Library==
#Once in the Face Editor, select Components from the Library drop-down menu in the top-right corner.
#You will see a small dialog box open that says Syncing Library. This This is an important step for being able to access all of the parts of the Library Manager.
#Click on tab labeled "Components." Scroll through the list of categories to find your desired component category type.
#Click on the component you wish to use. In order to access the component, you will need to download it to your local copy of Protocase Designer. Click Download.
#Once the component file has been downloaded, you will see three buttons: Place this item, Export to File and Create Personal Copy.
#Once you click Place this item, you will be prompted to choose your mounting fasteners, in the exact same way that you would see when you are importing your own STEP file of a component in your design.

==Save a Personal Copy of a Component in Your Library==
#If you want to save a copy of a component from the library with your desired fasteners, stay in the Face Editor.
#Click on the component you've placed with fasteners. Once it is selected, you will see a button on the right-hand menu called "Add to Library". Once you click this button, you will be prompted to edit the properties, including adding a personalized name for the component.
#Once you click OK, the grouped component will be saved in your personal library. You can access it and place it on your design by clicking the Personal tab in the Library Manager.

==Contribute to the Library Manager==
#You may save a cutout, graphic or component from your Personal Library and contribute it to the Public Library.
#Click the Add to Public Library button. Select the applicable category and sub-category, then click submit.
#The Protocase Designer team moderates the submissions - which can take 1-2 business days.
#Once your submission is cleared, the cutout, graphic or component you've added will show up in the public library.
#Remember – you should only add items to the public library if you want it to be accessible to others. Proprietary items for your organization should be kept to your own personal library.

=Importing Components=
You can import STEP or DXF components of circuit boards, fans and other accessories.

==Importing STEP Files==
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, in the right-hand corner, select '''Import 3D Component''' from the Import/Export Dropdown Menu.
#:[[File:1 Import Export Drop down Go.PNG|400px]]
#Protocase Designer will open a browser window so you can select the STEP file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#If your file is very large, Protocase Designer will display a loading warning. If the software takes longer than a minute or two to import your component, you may need to simplify the STEP file before importing it.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#:[[File:2 Component Choose Mating Face.PNG|600px]]
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
[[File:4 PEM Editor Dialog.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''Place Fasteners''' to open the Fasteners library. Choose the fastener you'd like to place.
#:[[File:5 Choose Fasteners and click Place This Item.PNG|600px]]
#Place the fastener in the appropriate mounting holes.
#:[[File:6 Place the Fastener where you want the component mounted.PNG|600px]]
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:7 once youve clicked Save to save your changes, you will see your component with fasteners in the Face Editor on your model.PNG|600px]]
 

==Importing DXF Files==
#Importing a DXF file of a component follows many of the same steps as importing a STEP file, with a few additional steps required.
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, under Imports, click Component. Protocase designer will open a browser window so you can select the DXF file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#Once Protocase Designer detects it is a DXF file being imported, an additional window will display that will allow you to customize how the DXF will be imported.
##Layers: DXF files contain many layers, and Protocase Designer cannot detect which layers actually need to be used. Use this tool to select which layers of your DXF you'd like to import.
##Thickness: Protocase Designer cannot automatically detect the thickness of your DXF file, so you can use this tool to set your thickness. Two important things to note – the thickness value is in inches – and your thickness choice will not be visible until the component is displayed in Protocase Designer’s 3D Editor.
##Units: Protocase Designer cannot currently detect units in DXF files (we are working on this!), so you will need to change the expected units. You can view the over bounds, which are displayed in inches. If you change the unit of measurement, the software will update the over bounds automatically. If your ideal unit of measurement is not listed as an option, you will need to convert the DXF’s units to inches before importing into Protocase Designer.
[[File:1 DXF Properties Selection.PNG|600px]]
#Once you have addressed Layers, Thickness and Units and made your desired changes, click the Accept button to save your changes and close the import tool. Protocase Designer will use the data you entered to generate a component from the DXF file you originally imported.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
(Tip: Make sure "Snap to Grid" is turned off, as it will allow you to place your fasteners precisely where you require them).
[[File:File:2 DXF Place Fasteners.PNG|600px]]
#Click the checkmark to save your changes.
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:3 DXF in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

==Changing Your Mounting Fasteners==
#Because you placed your mounting self-clinching fasteners in the Secondary Face Editor (as recommended), Protocase Designer makes your components and the fasteners a grouped object.
#Select your component (which is a grouped object with your fasteners). In the right-hand menu, click Edit.
#You will return to the Secondary Face Editor, where you can select and delete the fasteners you previously chose, and add in new ones as needed.

==Use Component Projection==
#Use the Component Projection feature to view an outline of your components when editing other faces in your Protocase Designer assembly.
#Once in the Face Editor, click on the View tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:View tab in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]
#In the Components section, click the '''Show Outline''' checkbox.
#:[[File:View Tab in Face Editor Component Projection Outline.PNG|300px]]
#To control the amount of detail shown in your component projection outline, use the slider. Far left means very little detail. The farther to the right you go, the level of detail increases.
#:[[File:Component Projection in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

=Manipulating objects=
==Selecting object(s)==
#On the '''Design''' tab in the Face Editor toolbar, select the '''Move''' tool. [[File:tool -edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]
#Do one of the following:
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.
#*To select multiple objects:
#**Click the first object, then down the <Shift> key and click the other objects; or
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects.
#:[[File:Selecting Objects.PNG|600px]]
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.
#:[[File:Light Blue box is drawn.PNG|300px]]

==Editing object(s)==
'''''To edit a single object''''' 
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''.
''or''
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type.
 
'''''To edit a group''''' 
*To edit a group, you must right-click to ungroup the items, then edit the object(s) individually. If you wish, you can right-click to make the objects a group once more.

==Moving object(s)==
To move a single object: 
#Select the object.
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location. 

To move several objects: 
#Select all the objects.
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location. 

To move cutouts from one face to another:
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items.
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with.
:For detailed instructions, see:
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]] 

==Locking item(s)==
To lock a single object:
#Select the object.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the item.
#:[[File:Locking items.PNG|600px]]
 
To Lock several objects:
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the items. 

==Grouping and ungrouping objects==
'''''To group objects'''''

#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the <Shift> key and select each object.
#Right click and select Group from the menu that displays.
#:[[File:1 Right click to Group Objects.PNG|400px]]
#Your objects are now grouped as one single object, which you can move around on the face of your model.
#:[[File:1 Grouped Object.PNG|400px]]
 
'''''To ungroup objects'''''
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.
#Click the group.
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel. 
'''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement. 
'''See Also'''
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]] 

==Aligning and distributing objects==
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.

#Select 2 or more objects.
#With the objects selected, right click and select either Align or Distribute the menu. 
#:[[File:Align Objects with objects selected.PNG|500px]]
'''Alignment''' 
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects 
 
'''''Notes:'''''
*Objects align to the first object selected.
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.

'''Distribute''' 
#:[[File:Distribute Horizontally.PNG|500px]]

[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops 
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects 

==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==
#You can find the cut, copy, paste, undo and redo functions in the '''Edit''' section of the Design tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:Cutting copying and pasting objects buttons.PNG|200px]]
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button.
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button.
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor.
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Move''' tool or press the <Esc> key when you are done. 

Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] buttons in the Edit section of the toolbar. 

==Adding and managing layers==
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.

'''Layer Toolbar'''

Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list.
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.)
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer.

'''''To add a new layer '''''
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel.
#:[[File:Adding and managing layers.PNG|300px]]
#:The Input dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer.

'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed.
#Paste the object(s).

'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list. 

==Using the Array Tool==
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool,
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects.

'''To create an array:'''
#Click the "Edit Face" button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.
#With the object highlighted, select the "Pattern" tool in the Design tab of the toolbar.
#:[[File:Array pattern icon.PNG|100px]]
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)
#:[[File:Select Array Type.PNG|200px]]

You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:

'''A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:'''
*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)
*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)
*Quantity (the number of objects in the array
#:[[File:Array Linear Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)
*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)
*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)
#:[[File:Array Circular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*X Spacing (horizontal spacing)
*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)
*X Quantity (number of columns)
*Y Quantity (number of rows)
#:[[File:Array Rectangular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the "ungroup" button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that
your objects are properly spaced.

#:[[File:Resize array.PNG|400px]]

=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=

===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===
#To print all faces of the enclosure, go to the '''View''' tab of the toolbar in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:View Print icon.PNG|400px]]
#Click the Print icon.
#:[[File:Print Icon.PNG|100px]]
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.
#:[[File:Print to Scale.PNG|400px]]
#Click '''Print.'''

===To calibrate the printer===
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button.
#A test page opens.
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle.
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens.
#If the printed rectangle is not 3" x 3", then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''. 
 

=Exporting and importing face templates=
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer. 
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.
#Select '''Graphics > Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics > Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image.
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.

Face Editor

2022-05-31T14:17:08Z

Amacdonald: /* Quick Search */

=Face Editor overview=
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.

[[File:Face Editor 1 Face Editor Overview.PNG|1000px|Face Editor Window]] 

[[File:Face Editor 2 Design Toolbar.PNG]] 

;2D Design bar
:Contains Cutout, Graphic, Masking, Reference and Exclusion, with the common drawing types (circle, ellipse, rectangle, path, line, arc, etc).

;2D Tools Bar
:Contains common tools such as move, trim, pattern, measure, dimension, coordinates.

===Face Editor preferences===
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]] in the 3D Viewer. 

=Viewing the face=

Click the View tab in the toolbar to see all of your viewing options.

[[File:View Toolbar.PNG]]

==Zooming==
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following.
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Face Editor Zoom In.PNG|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Face Editor Zoom Out.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.
:*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' > '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom. 
*To zoom in on a particular area:
*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom. 

==Resetting the view==
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Face Editor Reset View.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.
*Choose '''View''' > '''Reset View'''. 

==Viewing the front or back of the face==
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, click '''Back'' in the View Tab. 
[[File:Viewing the Front or the Back of the face front and back.PNG|200px]] 

=Coordinate System=
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.

[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]] 

===Choosing the Units of Measure===

You can set the default unit of measure.

#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM).
#Click '''OK.''' 

=Quick Search=
Instead of using the Library Manager to find the specific item you want to place, you can use the Quick Search tab to quickly find and place an item from our Library. 
[[File:Quick Search initial screen.PNG|800px]]
#Use the drop-down menu to search for the item you're looking for. Be as specific as possible.
#[[File:Quick Search finding fastener.PNG|800px]]
#Select the item and click the button labelled 'Place Item'.
#[[File:Quick Search Place Item.PNG|800px]]
*This tool can be especially useful for finding a specific fastener you need, by searching the part number.
 

=Drawing shapes=

==Selecting the drawing (object) type==
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''. 
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the "Mode" label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''. 
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]] 
 

===Using the Cutout object type===
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]] 

===Using the Graphic object type===
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.

====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press <Enter>. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.).
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is "None"; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads.
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish.
:*The printed area must be no more than 46"x46", and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24" high.
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed. 

=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Preferences'''.
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to "Graphic" for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.)
#Click '''OK'''. 

=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change.
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu.
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]] 

===Using the Exclusion object type===
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.

===Using the Masking object type===
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust. 
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked. 
'''Notes''' 
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1". 

===Using the Construct object type===
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production. 

==Drawing circles==
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing ellipses==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing rectangles and squares==
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing custom paths==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape. 

====Creating an arc using the Path tool====
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment).
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press <a>.
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer.
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size.
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing <A>).
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.) 

====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.

'''''To merge two or more objects'''''
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object.
#:[[File:Merge two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.)
#:[[File:Merge Select Objects.PNG]]
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu.
#:[[File:Merge Right Click and choose Merge.PNG]]
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout.
#:[[File:Merged into single cutout.PNG]] 
'''''To edit a merged object''''' 
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.
:[[File:Edit a Merged Object.PNG]] [[File:Merge move node of object.PNG]] 
'''Note''' If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. 
'''''To trim two or more objects''''' 
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.
#Place a circle on the face.
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it.
#:[[File:Trim two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.
#:[[File:Trim Select both objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Trim''' button.
#:[[File:Trim button.PNG]]
#:The outline of each object is outlined.
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]
#Use your cursor to eliminate the lines you do not want.
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode. '''Important!''' If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved. 
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such.
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]] 
'''See Also: '''
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]

====Solving problems with merging objects====
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.
 
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom: 
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]] 
If you then merge them and click <Esc>, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view.
 
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic.
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle.
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well.
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]
#When completed, click the <Esc> key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly. 

==Drawing lines==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.
#Drag to set the end of the line.
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing arcs==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc.
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc.
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc.
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Adding text==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.
#Click on the face and begin typing.
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''<Enter>''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time.
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''', and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''. 

====Adding special characters====
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.

There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.

If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows.
#Copy the character.
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:
#;[[File:Adding special characters.PNG|border|500px]]
#:'''Tip''' The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:
#;[[File:Registered trademark symbol text field of its own.PNG|500px]] 

'''See Also''' 
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]''' 

==Adding images==
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed. 
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/ '''Spotting the Difference''']. 
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed.
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.)
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received.
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves.
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.
'''Notes''': 
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit->Preferences->Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer.
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins.
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text->Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the "ghost" image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as "Plain SVG". This should allow the SVG image to import.
 
====Exporting images====
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export.
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens.
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. 

==Importing fonts==
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.
#Select '''Import font'''.
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.
'''Notes''':
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it.
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts.
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''

=Using the Measure tool=
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]] 

==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool initial selection of objects.PNG|600px]] 
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Move''' tool or press <Esc>. 

==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.
#Click the centre of the circle cutout.
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500px]]
#Enter "5" in '''x difference''' and "-3" in '''y difference'''.
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)
 

==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500 px]]
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of "1" and an '''x difference''' of "1".
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel. 

==Displaying measurements==
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes. 
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points''''' 
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Dimension Button.PNG|75px|bottom]]
#:The distance of "0.000" is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint.
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor.
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed.
#:[[File:Measure and display the distance between two points actual.PNG|500px]]
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green.
#:[[File:Green circle drawn around the snap-to point.PNG||500px]]
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:
#::The distance between the two points;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure.
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed. The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle.
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse.
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way.
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - 0 position.PNG|500px]]
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - near object.PNG|500px]]
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - snap point.PNG|500px]] 

'''''To delete a displayed measurement''''' 
Do either of the following:
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu.
*Highlight the line and press the <Delete> key. 

=Using the grid=
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects. 

Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel.

===Turn on/off the Grid===
#In the View tab, go the Grid section
#[[File:Snap to Grid.PNG|200px]]
#*Click the Show checkbox to show the Grid.
[[File:Turn on-off the grid Show grid.PNG|600px]]

===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===
#To have your objects snap to the Grid:
#*Click the Snap checkbox 

===Changing grid size and offset===
#On the View tab of the toolbar, click the Size icon [[File:Changing Grid Size icon.PNG|bottom]] in the Grid section.
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:
:[[File:Changing Grid Size.PNG|300px]]
 
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}
[[File:Grid with 1 in width and height, 1 in offset width and offset height.PNG|500px]]
 

=Managing object properties=

[[File:Top of Properties Panel.PNG|thumb|Properties panel view]]

[[File:Object Type needs to be called Path Type.PNG|thumb]]

===Top of Properties Panel===
[[File:Top of Properties Panel A.PNG]]
* The Properties Panel has the following tabs: Properties, Notes, Layers, Mode Help

*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.

===Fill===
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.

===Line Thickness===
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.

===Color===
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu.

===Type===
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.
* Object types include:
:Cutout
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)
:Exclusion
:Construct

===Origin===
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:
:'''Circles''' -- centre
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner
:'''Paths''' -- start point
:'''Lines''' -- start point
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner 
'''See Also''' 
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]

===Circles===
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.
===Ellipses===
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).
===Rectangles===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Lines===
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.
===Images===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Text===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.

===Path===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise 

==Adding notes==
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering & Design Services team. For example:
* "Notch in this bend."
* "Put a hinged door over this cutout."
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering & Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering & Design Services will give you the correct quote. 
'''''To add a note to an object'''''
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note.
#Go to the Notes tab in the Properties Panel to create a new note. Click the Green + Button to create a new note.
#;[[File:Notes Tab.PNG|500px]]
#;Enter your note, then click OK.
#;[[File:Add New Note.PNG|500px]]
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time. 
'''''To add a general note'''''
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' button.
#;[[File:To add a general note.PNG|500px]]
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it. 
'''''To delete a note'''''
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button. 
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View > View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance.
#:[[File:Review All notes.PNG|500 px]]
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected. 

=Adding cutouts=
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure. 
'''See Also:''' 
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]] 

===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutouts''' from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#;[[File:Cutout Library.PNG|150px]]
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description.
#;[[File:Adding a cutout by browsing the cutout library.PNG|500px]]
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout.
#;[[File:Click the Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.
#;[[File:Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process. 

==Adding "D" port cutouts==
You can add a "D"-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel.
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it.
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]] 

==Adding a circular gauge==
You can add a circular gauge graphic, which is a circle or arc shape with numbered notches, according to your requirements.
#In the Face Editor, choose ''' Place Circular Gauge ''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it.
#Once the circular gauge is placed, click ''' Move Item ''' or press Escape so that your circular gauge is selected.
#You can customize the circular gauge to your requirements, including color, line thickness, number of ticks, angle, label and more.

=Adding hardware=
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles.

==Adding self-clinching fasteners==
Protocase uses PEM® brand self-clinching fasteners.
#In the Face Editor, choose Fasteners from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#:[[File:Adding Self Clinching Fasteners.PNG|300px]]
#:The Fasteners section of the Library Manager opens.
#:[[File:Library Manager self clinching fasteners.PNG|500px]]
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)
#Select the thread '''Length'''.
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed.
#Select a '''Part Number'''.
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature. 
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with "ZI".) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones.
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.
#:Place the fastener on the face.
#:[[File:Self Clinching Fastener Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Move''' button or press the '''Esc''' key.
#:[[File:Self clinching fasteners in 3D viewer.PNG|500px]] 
'''See Also''': 
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']] 

==Adding hardware such as handles==
#In the '''Library''' drop-down menu, click '''Hardware'''
#:[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px]]
#Browse the hardware items to find the item you need.
#:[[File:Library Manager Hardware.PNG|500px]]
#Select the hardware item you want to use, and click '''Place This Item'''
#Place item on the face where you want it.
#Click Save to view your design in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:Hardware Handles 3D viewer.PNG|500px]]

==Adding Rubber Feet==
#On the Library drop-down menu in the right corner, select Hardware and click '''GO'''.
#;[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px|]]
#Choose the folder labelled '''Rubber Feet'''. Select the rubber foot you require: Large Rubber Foot, Medium Rubber Foot, Small Rubber Foot or Tapered (which is attached via adhesive).
#;[[File:Library Manager Rubber Feet.PNG|600px|]]
#Click '''Place This Item''' to place the rubber foot in your desired location.
#In order to have a stable enclosure, you will then need to place the same rubber foot in the other three corners of your enclosure.
#;[[File:Rubber Feet Placed in Face Editor.PNG|600px|]]
#The Protocase Engineering team recommends placing each rubber foot at least 0.5 or 1 inch away from the edges of your enclosure. If your enclosure is very large, you may go even farther from the edge if required.
#;[[File:Medium Rubber feet in 3D viewer.PNG|600px|]]

==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==
====Adding a countersink to a face====
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole.
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Adding a countersink to a face.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of "100.0° #2" indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.
#;[[File:Countersink Metal Thickness.PNG|600px]]
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png|200px]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera. 

====Adding a tapped hole to a face====
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole.
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Tapped Hole.PNG|500px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of "2-56 [0.07]" indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07" for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.)
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face. 
#:[[File:Tapped Hole solid circle with partial circle around it.PNG]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.
 

====Adding screws to a face====
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''.
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener. 

====Replacing screws and PEMs====
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the fastener. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it.
#Right-click and select '''Replace PEMs''' from the menu that displays.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs right click.PNG|300px]]
#The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the fastener you wish to use, and then click the '''Place This Item'' to select this fastener instead of the existing one.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs choose new fastener.PNG|600px]]

==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure. 
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''
#Click '''New'''.
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens.
#:[[File:Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly click new.PNG|250 px]]
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary.
#:[[File:Choose the bracket you want to customize.PNG|600 px]]
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button.
#:The 3D View window opens.
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the left hand panel.
#You will be prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure).
#:The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:Sub-assembly dialog.PNG|500 px]]
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is "L Bracket by Base - Bottom". ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''
#:'''Part Number'''
#:'''Description'''
#Click '''OK.'''
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu. 
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face. 

'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure.
#Click the '''Place Item''' button.
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon.
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.
#Specify how you would like your sub-assembly attached: '''welding, self-clinching fasteners or other'''.
#Whether you choose welding or self-clinching fasteners, please provide as many specific details as you can. (Ex: specify the type of welding you would like, such as tack weld, plug weld, etc).
# For self-clinching fasteners, please provide as much detail as to what fastener you would like used. Ex: nuts, studs or standoffs. Include all of the key information, including part number, thread size and length. If you do not have a specific preference, please advise our Engineering & Design Services team that they may choose the most logical option.
#Choose "other" if you'd prefer to attach your sub-assembly yourself once you receive the completed order.
#'''Note''': Once you order your design, our Engineering & Design Services team may contact you if they require more information or need to clarify details.
#View video tutorial about sub-assemblies: https://youtu.be/XciURDevnXA
 

=Adding Graphics from the Graphics Library=

The Graphics Library allows you to place common symbols and graphics, such as USB, Electrical Ground and Caution.
#Once in the Face Editor, you can access the Library by selecting Graphics from the drop-down Library menu in the top corner.
#[[File:Graphics from Graphics Library.PNG|400px]]
#The Graphics library is organized by category: Electronic Symbols, Flags, Marks, Warning & Caution Symbols and Other. Click on the Category to expand the list and see all of the graphic symbols available.
#[[File:Library manager Graphics Library.PNG|600px]]
#Once you’ve found the graphic symbol you want to place on your design, click the symbol name and then click Place This Item. Resize and relocate the graphics symbol, just as you would with any other object.

Note: You can also change the color of your symbol, so long as the symbol you’ve placed is only one color in nature. (Any symbol that is more than one color, such as Electrostatic Sensitivity, Laser, Pacemaker and Two Person Lift, cannot be altered with different colors. Flag graphics' colors also cannot be changed).

=Adding Components from Library=
Protocase Designer's Library Manager includes a tab for Components, where you can quickly and easily download boards, connectors, drives, fans, heatsinks, LCD screens and power supplies, and then place on you rdesign.

==Add Components from Library==
#Once in the Face Editor, select Components from the Library drop-down menu in the top-right corner.
#You will see a small dialog box open that says Syncing Library. This This is an important step for being able to access all of the parts of the Library Manager.
#Click on tab labeled "Components." Scroll through the list of categories to find your desired component category type.
#Click on the component you wish to use. In order to access the component, you will need to download it to your local copy of Protocase Designer. Click Download.
#Once the component file has been downloaded, you will see three buttons: Place this item, Export to File and Create Personal Copy.
#Once you click Place this item, you will be prompted to choose your mounting fasteners, in the exact same way that you would see when you are importing your own STEP file of a component in your design.

==Save a Personal Copy of a Component in Your Library==
#If you want to save a copy of a component from the library with your desired fasteners, stay in the Face Editor.
#Click on the component you've placed with fasteners. Once it is selected, you will see a button on the right-hand menu called "Add to Library". Once you click this button, you will be prompted to edit the properties, including adding a personalized name for the component.
#Once you click OK, the grouped component will be saved in your personal library. You can access it and place it on your design by clicking the Personal tab in the Library Manager.

==Contribute to the Library Manager==
#You may save a cutout, graphic or component from your Personal Library and contribute it to the Public Library.
#Click the Add to Public Library button. Select the applicable category and sub-category, then click submit.
#The Protocase Designer team moderates the submissions - which can take 1-2 business days.
#Once your submission is cleared, the cutout, graphic or component you've added will show up in the public library.
#Remember – you should only add items to the public library if you want it to be accessible to others. Proprietary items for your organization should be kept to your own personal library.

=Importing Components=
You can import STEP or DXF components of circuit boards, fans and other accessories.

==Importing STEP Files==
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, in the right-hand corner, select '''Import 3D Component''' from the Import/Export Dropdown Menu.
#:[[File:1 Import Export Drop down Go.PNG|400px]]
#Protocase Designer will open a browser window so you can select the STEP file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#If your file is very large, Protocase Designer will display a loading warning. If the software takes longer than a minute or two to import your component, you may need to simplify the STEP file before importing it.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#:[[File:2 Component Choose Mating Face.PNG|600px]]
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
[[File:4 PEM Editor Dialog.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''Place Fasteners''' to open the Fasteners library. Choose the fastener you'd like to place.
#:[[File:5 Choose Fasteners and click Place This Item.PNG|600px]]
#Place the fastener in the appropriate mounting holes.
#:[[File:6 Place the Fastener where you want the component mounted.PNG|600px]]
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:7 once youve clicked Save to save your changes, you will see your component with fasteners in the Face Editor on your model.PNG|600px]]
 

==Importing DXF Files==
#Importing a DXF file of a component follows many of the same steps as importing a STEP file, with a few additional steps required.
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, under Imports, click Component. Protocase designer will open a browser window so you can select the DXF file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#Once Protocase Designer detects it is a DXF file being imported, an additional window will display that will allow you to customize how the DXF will be imported.
##Layers: DXF files contain many layers, and Protocase Designer cannot detect which layers actually need to be used. Use this tool to select which layers of your DXF you'd like to import.
##Thickness: Protocase Designer cannot automatically detect the thickness of your DXF file, so you can use this tool to set your thickness. Two important things to note – the thickness value is in inches – and your thickness choice will not be visible until the component is displayed in Protocase Designer’s 3D Editor.
##Units: Protocase Designer cannot currently detect units in DXF files (we are working on this!), so you will need to change the expected units. You can view the over bounds, which are displayed in inches. If you change the unit of measurement, the software will update the over bounds automatically. If your ideal unit of measurement is not listed as an option, you will need to convert the DXF’s units to inches before importing into Protocase Designer.
[[File:1 DXF Properties Selection.PNG|600px]]
#Once you have addressed Layers, Thickness and Units and made your desired changes, click the Accept button to save your changes and close the import tool. Protocase Designer will use the data you entered to generate a component from the DXF file you originally imported.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
(Tip: Make sure "Snap to Grid" is turned off, as it will allow you to place your fasteners precisely where you require them).
[[File:File:2 DXF Place Fasteners.PNG|600px]]
#Click the checkmark to save your changes.
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:3 DXF in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

==Changing Your Mounting Fasteners==
#Because you placed your mounting self-clinching fasteners in the Secondary Face Editor (as recommended), Protocase Designer makes your components and the fasteners a grouped object.
#Select your component (which is a grouped object with your fasteners). In the right-hand menu, click Edit.
#You will return to the Secondary Face Editor, where you can select and delete the fasteners you previously chose, and add in new ones as needed.

==Use Component Projection==
#Use the Component Projection feature to view an outline of your components when editing other faces in your Protocase Designer assembly.
#Once in the Face Editor, click on the View tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:View tab in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]
#In the Components section, click the '''Show Outline''' checkbox.
#:[[File:View Tab in Face Editor Component Projection Outline.PNG|300px]]
#To control the amount of detail shown in your component projection outline, use the slider. Far left means very little detail. The farther to the right you go, the level of detail increases.
#:[[File:Component Projection in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

=Manipulating objects=
==Selecting object(s)==
#On the '''Design''' tab in the Face Editor toolbar, select the '''Move''' tool. [[File:tool -edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]
#Do one of the following:
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.
#*To select multiple objects:
#**Click the first object, then down the <Shift> key and click the other objects; or
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects.
#:[[File:Selecting Objects.PNG|600px]]
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.
#:[[File:Light Blue box is drawn.PNG|300px]]

==Editing object(s)==
'''''To edit a single object''''' 
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''.
''or''
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type.
 
'''''To edit a group''''' 
*To edit a group, you must right-click to ungroup the items, then edit the object(s) individually. If you wish, you can right-click to make the objects a group once more.

==Moving object(s)==
To move a single object: 
#Select the object.
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location. 

To move several objects: 
#Select all the objects.
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location. 

To move cutouts from one face to another:
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items.
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with.
:For detailed instructions, see:
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]] 

==Locking item(s)==
To lock a single object:
#Select the object.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the item.
#:[[File:Locking items.PNG|600px]]
 
To Lock several objects:
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the items. 

==Grouping and ungrouping objects==
'''''To group objects'''''

#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the <Shift> key and select each object.
#Right click and select Group from the menu that displays.
#:[[File:1 Right click to Group Objects.PNG|400px]]
#Your objects are now grouped as one single object, which you can move around on the face of your model.
#:[[File:1 Grouped Object.PNG|400px]]
 
'''''To ungroup objects'''''
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.
#Click the group.
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel. 
'''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement. 
'''See Also'''
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]] 

==Aligning and distributing objects==
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.

#Select 2 or more objects.
#With the objects selected, right click and select either Align or Distribute the menu. 
#:[[File:Align Objects with objects selected.PNG|500px]]
'''Alignment''' 
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects 
 
'''''Notes:'''''
*Objects align to the first object selected.
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.

'''Distribute''' 
#:[[File:Distribute Horizontally.PNG|500px]]

[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops 
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects 

==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==
#You can find the cut, copy, paste, undo and redo functions in the '''Edit''' section of the Design tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:Cutting copying and pasting objects buttons.PNG|200px]]
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button.
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button.
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor.
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Move''' tool or press the <Esc> key when you are done. 

Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] buttons in the Edit section of the toolbar. 

==Adding and managing layers==
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.

'''Layer Toolbar'''

Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list.
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.)
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer.

'''''To add a new layer '''''
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel.
#:[[File:Adding and managing layers.PNG|300px]]
#:The Input dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer.

'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed.
#Paste the object(s).

'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list. 

==Using the Array Tool==
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool,
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects.

'''To create an array:'''
#Click the "Edit Face" button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.
#With the object highlighted, select the "Pattern" tool in the Design tab of the toolbar.
#:[[File:Array pattern icon.PNG|100px]]
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)
#:[[File:Select Array Type.PNG|200px]]

You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:

'''A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:'''
*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)
*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)
*Quantity (the number of objects in the array
#:[[File:Array Linear Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)
*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)
*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)
#:[[File:Array Circular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*X Spacing (horizontal spacing)
*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)
*X Quantity (number of columns)
*Y Quantity (number of rows)
#:[[File:Array Rectangular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the "ungroup" button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that
your objects are properly spaced.

#:[[File:Resize array.PNG|400px]]

=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=

===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===
#To print all faces of the enclosure, go to the '''View''' tab of the toolbar in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:View Print icon.PNG|400px]]
#Click the Print icon.
#:[[File:Print Icon.PNG|100px]]
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.
#:[[File:Print to Scale.PNG|400px]]
#Click '''Print.'''

===To calibrate the printer===
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button.
#A test page opens.
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle.
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens.
#If the printed rectangle is not 3" x 3", then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''. 
 

=Exporting and importing face templates=
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer. 
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.
#Select '''Graphics > Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics > Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image.
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.

Face Editor

2022-05-31T14:16:53Z

Amacdonald: /* Quick Search */

=Face Editor overview=
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.

[[File:Face Editor 1 Face Editor Overview.PNG|1000px|Face Editor Window]] 

[[File:Face Editor 2 Design Toolbar.PNG]] 

;2D Design bar
:Contains Cutout, Graphic, Masking, Reference and Exclusion, with the common drawing types (circle, ellipse, rectangle, path, line, arc, etc).

;2D Tools Bar
:Contains common tools such as move, trim, pattern, measure, dimension, coordinates.

===Face Editor preferences===
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]] in the 3D Viewer. 

=Viewing the face=

Click the View tab in the toolbar to see all of your viewing options.

[[File:View Toolbar.PNG]]

==Zooming==
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following.
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Face Editor Zoom In.PNG|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Face Editor Zoom Out.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.
:*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' > '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom. 
*To zoom in on a particular area:
*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom. 

==Resetting the view==
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Face Editor Reset View.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.
*Choose '''View''' > '''Reset View'''. 

==Viewing the front or back of the face==
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, click '''Back'' in the View Tab. 
[[File:Viewing the Front or the Back of the face front and back.PNG|200px]] 

=Coordinate System=
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.

[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]] 

===Choosing the Units of Measure===

You can set the default unit of measure.

#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM).
#Click '''OK.''' 

=Quick Search=
Instead of using the Library Manager to find the specific item you want to place, you can use the Quick Search tab to quickly find and place an item from our Library. 
[[File:Quick Search initial screen.PNG|800px]]
#Use the drop-down menu to search for the item you're looking for. Be as specific as possible.
[[File:Quick Search finding fastener.PNG|800px]]
#Select the item and click the button labelled 'Place Item'.
[[File:Quick Search Place Item.PNG|800px]]
*This tool can be especially useful for finding a specific fastener you need, by searching the part number.
 

=Drawing shapes=

==Selecting the drawing (object) type==
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''. 
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the "Mode" label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''. 
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]] 
 

===Using the Cutout object type===
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]] 

===Using the Graphic object type===
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.

====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press <Enter>. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.).
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is "None"; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads.
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish.
:*The printed area must be no more than 46"x46", and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24" high.
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed. 

=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Preferences'''.
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to "Graphic" for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.)
#Click '''OK'''. 

=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change.
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu.
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]] 

===Using the Exclusion object type===
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.

===Using the Masking object type===
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust. 
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked. 
'''Notes''' 
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1". 

===Using the Construct object type===
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production. 

==Drawing circles==
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing ellipses==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing rectangles and squares==
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing custom paths==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape. 

====Creating an arc using the Path tool====
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment).
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press <a>.
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer.
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size.
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing <A>).
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.) 

====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.

'''''To merge two or more objects'''''
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object.
#:[[File:Merge two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.)
#:[[File:Merge Select Objects.PNG]]
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu.
#:[[File:Merge Right Click and choose Merge.PNG]]
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout.
#:[[File:Merged into single cutout.PNG]] 
'''''To edit a merged object''''' 
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.
:[[File:Edit a Merged Object.PNG]] [[File:Merge move node of object.PNG]] 
'''Note''' If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. 
'''''To trim two or more objects''''' 
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.
#Place a circle on the face.
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it.
#:[[File:Trim two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.
#:[[File:Trim Select both objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Trim''' button.
#:[[File:Trim button.PNG]]
#:The outline of each object is outlined.
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]
#Use your cursor to eliminate the lines you do not want.
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode. '''Important!''' If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved. 
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such.
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]] 
'''See Also: '''
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]

====Solving problems with merging objects====
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.
 
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom: 
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]] 
If you then merge them and click <Esc>, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view.
 
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic.
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle.
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well.
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]
#When completed, click the <Esc> key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly. 

==Drawing lines==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.
#Drag to set the end of the line.
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing arcs==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc.
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc.
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc.
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Adding text==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.
#Click on the face and begin typing.
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''<Enter>''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time.
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''', and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''. 

====Adding special characters====
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.

There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.

If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows.
#Copy the character.
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:
#;[[File:Adding special characters.PNG|border|500px]]
#:'''Tip''' The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:
#;[[File:Registered trademark symbol text field of its own.PNG|500px]] 

'''See Also''' 
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]''' 

==Adding images==
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed. 
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/ '''Spotting the Difference''']. 
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed.
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.)
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received.
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves.
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.
'''Notes''': 
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit->Preferences->Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer.
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins.
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text->Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the "ghost" image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as "Plain SVG". This should allow the SVG image to import.
 
====Exporting images====
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export.
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens.
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. 

==Importing fonts==
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.
#Select '''Import font'''.
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.
'''Notes''':
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it.
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts.
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''

=Using the Measure tool=
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]] 

==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool initial selection of objects.PNG|600px]] 
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Move''' tool or press <Esc>. 

==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.
#Click the centre of the circle cutout.
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500px]]
#Enter "5" in '''x difference''' and "-3" in '''y difference'''.
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)
 

==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500 px]]
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of "1" and an '''x difference''' of "1".
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel. 

==Displaying measurements==
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes. 
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points''''' 
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Dimension Button.PNG|75px|bottom]]
#:The distance of "0.000" is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint.
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor.
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed.
#:[[File:Measure and display the distance between two points actual.PNG|500px]]
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green.
#:[[File:Green circle drawn around the snap-to point.PNG||500px]]
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:
#::The distance between the two points;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure.
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed. The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle.
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse.
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way.
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - 0 position.PNG|500px]]
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - near object.PNG|500px]]
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - snap point.PNG|500px]] 

'''''To delete a displayed measurement''''' 
Do either of the following:
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu.
*Highlight the line and press the <Delete> key. 

=Using the grid=
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects. 

Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel.

===Turn on/off the Grid===
#In the View tab, go the Grid section
#[[File:Snap to Grid.PNG|200px]]
#*Click the Show checkbox to show the Grid.
[[File:Turn on-off the grid Show grid.PNG|600px]]

===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===
#To have your objects snap to the Grid:
#*Click the Snap checkbox 

===Changing grid size and offset===
#On the View tab of the toolbar, click the Size icon [[File:Changing Grid Size icon.PNG|bottom]] in the Grid section.
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:
:[[File:Changing Grid Size.PNG|300px]]
 
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}
[[File:Grid with 1 in width and height, 1 in offset width and offset height.PNG|500px]]
 

=Managing object properties=

[[File:Top of Properties Panel.PNG|thumb|Properties panel view]]

[[File:Object Type needs to be called Path Type.PNG|thumb]]

===Top of Properties Panel===
[[File:Top of Properties Panel A.PNG]]
* The Properties Panel has the following tabs: Properties, Notes, Layers, Mode Help

*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.

===Fill===
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.

===Line Thickness===
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.

===Color===
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu.

===Type===
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.
* Object types include:
:Cutout
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)
:Exclusion
:Construct

===Origin===
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:
:'''Circles''' -- centre
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner
:'''Paths''' -- start point
:'''Lines''' -- start point
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner 
'''See Also''' 
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]

===Circles===
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.
===Ellipses===
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).
===Rectangles===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Lines===
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.
===Images===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Text===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.

===Path===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise 

==Adding notes==
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering & Design Services team. For example:
* "Notch in this bend."
* "Put a hinged door over this cutout."
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering & Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering & Design Services will give you the correct quote. 
'''''To add a note to an object'''''
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note.
#Go to the Notes tab in the Properties Panel to create a new note. Click the Green + Button to create a new note.
#;[[File:Notes Tab.PNG|500px]]
#;Enter your note, then click OK.
#;[[File:Add New Note.PNG|500px]]
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time. 
'''''To add a general note'''''
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' button.
#;[[File:To add a general note.PNG|500px]]
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it. 
'''''To delete a note'''''
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button. 
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View > View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance.
#:[[File:Review All notes.PNG|500 px]]
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected. 

=Adding cutouts=
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure. 
'''See Also:''' 
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]] 

===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutouts''' from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#;[[File:Cutout Library.PNG|150px]]
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description.
#;[[File:Adding a cutout by browsing the cutout library.PNG|500px]]
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout.
#;[[File:Click the Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.
#;[[File:Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process. 

==Adding "D" port cutouts==
You can add a "D"-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel.
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it.
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]] 

==Adding a circular gauge==
You can add a circular gauge graphic, which is a circle or arc shape with numbered notches, according to your requirements.
#In the Face Editor, choose ''' Place Circular Gauge ''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it.
#Once the circular gauge is placed, click ''' Move Item ''' or press Escape so that your circular gauge is selected.
#You can customize the circular gauge to your requirements, including color, line thickness, number of ticks, angle, label and more.

=Adding hardware=
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles.

==Adding self-clinching fasteners==
Protocase uses PEM® brand self-clinching fasteners.
#In the Face Editor, choose Fasteners from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#:[[File:Adding Self Clinching Fasteners.PNG|300px]]
#:The Fasteners section of the Library Manager opens.
#:[[File:Library Manager self clinching fasteners.PNG|500px]]
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)
#Select the thread '''Length'''.
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed.
#Select a '''Part Number'''.
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature. 
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with "ZI".) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones.
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.
#:Place the fastener on the face.
#:[[File:Self Clinching Fastener Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Move''' button or press the '''Esc''' key.
#:[[File:Self clinching fasteners in 3D viewer.PNG|500px]] 
'''See Also''': 
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']] 

==Adding hardware such as handles==
#In the '''Library''' drop-down menu, click '''Hardware'''
#:[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px]]
#Browse the hardware items to find the item you need.
#:[[File:Library Manager Hardware.PNG|500px]]
#Select the hardware item you want to use, and click '''Place This Item'''
#Place item on the face where you want it.
#Click Save to view your design in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:Hardware Handles 3D viewer.PNG|500px]]

==Adding Rubber Feet==
#On the Library drop-down menu in the right corner, select Hardware and click '''GO'''.
#;[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px|]]
#Choose the folder labelled '''Rubber Feet'''. Select the rubber foot you require: Large Rubber Foot, Medium Rubber Foot, Small Rubber Foot or Tapered (which is attached via adhesive).
#;[[File:Library Manager Rubber Feet.PNG|600px|]]
#Click '''Place This Item''' to place the rubber foot in your desired location.
#In order to have a stable enclosure, you will then need to place the same rubber foot in the other three corners of your enclosure.
#;[[File:Rubber Feet Placed in Face Editor.PNG|600px|]]
#The Protocase Engineering team recommends placing each rubber foot at least 0.5 or 1 inch away from the edges of your enclosure. If your enclosure is very large, you may go even farther from the edge if required.
#;[[File:Medium Rubber feet in 3D viewer.PNG|600px|]]

==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==
====Adding a countersink to a face====
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole.
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Adding a countersink to a face.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of "100.0° #2" indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.
#;[[File:Countersink Metal Thickness.PNG|600px]]
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png|200px]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera. 

====Adding a tapped hole to a face====
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole.
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Tapped Hole.PNG|500px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of "2-56 [0.07]" indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07" for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.)
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face. 
#:[[File:Tapped Hole solid circle with partial circle around it.PNG]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.
 

====Adding screws to a face====
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''.
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener. 

====Replacing screws and PEMs====
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the fastener. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it.
#Right-click and select '''Replace PEMs''' from the menu that displays.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs right click.PNG|300px]]
#The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the fastener you wish to use, and then click the '''Place This Item'' to select this fastener instead of the existing one.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs choose new fastener.PNG|600px]]

==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure. 
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''
#Click '''New'''.
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens.
#:[[File:Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly click new.PNG|250 px]]
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary.
#:[[File:Choose the bracket you want to customize.PNG|600 px]]
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button.
#:The 3D View window opens.
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the left hand panel.
#You will be prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure).
#:The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:Sub-assembly dialog.PNG|500 px]]
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is "L Bracket by Base - Bottom". ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''
#:'''Part Number'''
#:'''Description'''
#Click '''OK.'''
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu. 
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face. 

'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure.
#Click the '''Place Item''' button.
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon.
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.
#Specify how you would like your sub-assembly attached: '''welding, self-clinching fasteners or other'''.
#Whether you choose welding or self-clinching fasteners, please provide as many specific details as you can. (Ex: specify the type of welding you would like, such as tack weld, plug weld, etc).
# For self-clinching fasteners, please provide as much detail as to what fastener you would like used. Ex: nuts, studs or standoffs. Include all of the key information, including part number, thread size and length. If you do not have a specific preference, please advise our Engineering & Design Services team that they may choose the most logical option.
#Choose "other" if you'd prefer to attach your sub-assembly yourself once you receive the completed order.
#'''Note''': Once you order your design, our Engineering & Design Services team may contact you if they require more information or need to clarify details.
#View video tutorial about sub-assemblies: https://youtu.be/XciURDevnXA
 

=Adding Graphics from the Graphics Library=

The Graphics Library allows you to place common symbols and graphics, such as USB, Electrical Ground and Caution.
#Once in the Face Editor, you can access the Library by selecting Graphics from the drop-down Library menu in the top corner.
#[[File:Graphics from Graphics Library.PNG|400px]]
#The Graphics library is organized by category: Electronic Symbols, Flags, Marks, Warning & Caution Symbols and Other. Click on the Category to expand the list and see all of the graphic symbols available.
#[[File:Library manager Graphics Library.PNG|600px]]
#Once you’ve found the graphic symbol you want to place on your design, click the symbol name and then click Place This Item. Resize and relocate the graphics symbol, just as you would with any other object.

Note: You can also change the color of your symbol, so long as the symbol you’ve placed is only one color in nature. (Any symbol that is more than one color, such as Electrostatic Sensitivity, Laser, Pacemaker and Two Person Lift, cannot be altered with different colors. Flag graphics' colors also cannot be changed).

=Adding Components from Library=
Protocase Designer's Library Manager includes a tab for Components, where you can quickly and easily download boards, connectors, drives, fans, heatsinks, LCD screens and power supplies, and then place on you rdesign.

==Add Components from Library==
#Once in the Face Editor, select Components from the Library drop-down menu in the top-right corner.
#You will see a small dialog box open that says Syncing Library. This This is an important step for being able to access all of the parts of the Library Manager.
#Click on tab labeled "Components." Scroll through the list of categories to find your desired component category type.
#Click on the component you wish to use. In order to access the component, you will need to download it to your local copy of Protocase Designer. Click Download.
#Once the component file has been downloaded, you will see three buttons: Place this item, Export to File and Create Personal Copy.
#Once you click Place this item, you will be prompted to choose your mounting fasteners, in the exact same way that you would see when you are importing your own STEP file of a component in your design.

==Save a Personal Copy of a Component in Your Library==
#If you want to save a copy of a component from the library with your desired fasteners, stay in the Face Editor.
#Click on the component you've placed with fasteners. Once it is selected, you will see a button on the right-hand menu called "Add to Library". Once you click this button, you will be prompted to edit the properties, including adding a personalized name for the component.
#Once you click OK, the grouped component will be saved in your personal library. You can access it and place it on your design by clicking the Personal tab in the Library Manager.

==Contribute to the Library Manager==
#You may save a cutout, graphic or component from your Personal Library and contribute it to the Public Library.
#Click the Add to Public Library button. Select the applicable category and sub-category, then click submit.
#The Protocase Designer team moderates the submissions - which can take 1-2 business days.
#Once your submission is cleared, the cutout, graphic or component you've added will show up in the public library.
#Remember – you should only add items to the public library if you want it to be accessible to others. Proprietary items for your organization should be kept to your own personal library.

=Importing Components=
You can import STEP or DXF components of circuit boards, fans and other accessories.

==Importing STEP Files==
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, in the right-hand corner, select '''Import 3D Component''' from the Import/Export Dropdown Menu.
#:[[File:1 Import Export Drop down Go.PNG|400px]]
#Protocase Designer will open a browser window so you can select the STEP file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#If your file is very large, Protocase Designer will display a loading warning. If the software takes longer than a minute or two to import your component, you may need to simplify the STEP file before importing it.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#:[[File:2 Component Choose Mating Face.PNG|600px]]
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
[[File:4 PEM Editor Dialog.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''Place Fasteners''' to open the Fasteners library. Choose the fastener you'd like to place.
#:[[File:5 Choose Fasteners and click Place This Item.PNG|600px]]
#Place the fastener in the appropriate mounting holes.
#:[[File:6 Place the Fastener where you want the component mounted.PNG|600px]]
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:7 once youve clicked Save to save your changes, you will see your component with fasteners in the Face Editor on your model.PNG|600px]]
 

==Importing DXF Files==
#Importing a DXF file of a component follows many of the same steps as importing a STEP file, with a few additional steps required.
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, under Imports, click Component. Protocase designer will open a browser window so you can select the DXF file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#Once Protocase Designer detects it is a DXF file being imported, an additional window will display that will allow you to customize how the DXF will be imported.
##Layers: DXF files contain many layers, and Protocase Designer cannot detect which layers actually need to be used. Use this tool to select which layers of your DXF you'd like to import.
##Thickness: Protocase Designer cannot automatically detect the thickness of your DXF file, so you can use this tool to set your thickness. Two important things to note – the thickness value is in inches – and your thickness choice will not be visible until the component is displayed in Protocase Designer’s 3D Editor.
##Units: Protocase Designer cannot currently detect units in DXF files (we are working on this!), so you will need to change the expected units. You can view the over bounds, which are displayed in inches. If you change the unit of measurement, the software will update the over bounds automatically. If your ideal unit of measurement is not listed as an option, you will need to convert the DXF’s units to inches before importing into Protocase Designer.
[[File:1 DXF Properties Selection.PNG|600px]]
#Once you have addressed Layers, Thickness and Units and made your desired changes, click the Accept button to save your changes and close the import tool. Protocase Designer will use the data you entered to generate a component from the DXF file you originally imported.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
(Tip: Make sure "Snap to Grid" is turned off, as it will allow you to place your fasteners precisely where you require them).
[[File:File:2 DXF Place Fasteners.PNG|600px]]
#Click the checkmark to save your changes.
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:3 DXF in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

==Changing Your Mounting Fasteners==
#Because you placed your mounting self-clinching fasteners in the Secondary Face Editor (as recommended), Protocase Designer makes your components and the fasteners a grouped object.
#Select your component (which is a grouped object with your fasteners). In the right-hand menu, click Edit.
#You will return to the Secondary Face Editor, where you can select and delete the fasteners you previously chose, and add in new ones as needed.

==Use Component Projection==
#Use the Component Projection feature to view an outline of your components when editing other faces in your Protocase Designer assembly.
#Once in the Face Editor, click on the View tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:View tab in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]
#In the Components section, click the '''Show Outline''' checkbox.
#:[[File:View Tab in Face Editor Component Projection Outline.PNG|300px]]
#To control the amount of detail shown in your component projection outline, use the slider. Far left means very little detail. The farther to the right you go, the level of detail increases.
#:[[File:Component Projection in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

=Manipulating objects=
==Selecting object(s)==
#On the '''Design''' tab in the Face Editor toolbar, select the '''Move''' tool. [[File:tool -edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]
#Do one of the following:
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.
#*To select multiple objects:
#**Click the first object, then down the <Shift> key and click the other objects; or
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects.
#:[[File:Selecting Objects.PNG|600px]]
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.
#:[[File:Light Blue box is drawn.PNG|300px]]

==Editing object(s)==
'''''To edit a single object''''' 
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''.
''or''
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type.
 
'''''To edit a group''''' 
*To edit a group, you must right-click to ungroup the items, then edit the object(s) individually. If you wish, you can right-click to make the objects a group once more.

==Moving object(s)==
To move a single object: 
#Select the object.
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location. 

To move several objects: 
#Select all the objects.
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location. 

To move cutouts from one face to another:
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items.
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with.
:For detailed instructions, see:
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]] 

==Locking item(s)==
To lock a single object:
#Select the object.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the item.
#:[[File:Locking items.PNG|600px]]
 
To Lock several objects:
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the items. 

==Grouping and ungrouping objects==
'''''To group objects'''''

#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the <Shift> key and select each object.
#Right click and select Group from the menu that displays.
#:[[File:1 Right click to Group Objects.PNG|400px]]
#Your objects are now grouped as one single object, which you can move around on the face of your model.
#:[[File:1 Grouped Object.PNG|400px]]
 
'''''To ungroup objects'''''
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.
#Click the group.
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel. 
'''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement. 
'''See Also'''
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]] 

==Aligning and distributing objects==
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.

#Select 2 or more objects.
#With the objects selected, right click and select either Align or Distribute the menu. 
#:[[File:Align Objects with objects selected.PNG|500px]]
'''Alignment''' 
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects 
 
'''''Notes:'''''
*Objects align to the first object selected.
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.

'''Distribute''' 
#:[[File:Distribute Horizontally.PNG|500px]]

[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops 
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects 

==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==
#You can find the cut, copy, paste, undo and redo functions in the '''Edit''' section of the Design tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:Cutting copying and pasting objects buttons.PNG|200px]]
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button.
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button.
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor.
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Move''' tool or press the <Esc> key when you are done. 

Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] buttons in the Edit section of the toolbar. 

==Adding and managing layers==
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.

'''Layer Toolbar'''

Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list.
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.)
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer.

'''''To add a new layer '''''
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel.
#:[[File:Adding and managing layers.PNG|300px]]
#:The Input dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer.

'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed.
#Paste the object(s).

'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list. 

==Using the Array Tool==
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool,
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects.

'''To create an array:'''
#Click the "Edit Face" button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.
#With the object highlighted, select the "Pattern" tool in the Design tab of the toolbar.
#:[[File:Array pattern icon.PNG|100px]]
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)
#:[[File:Select Array Type.PNG|200px]]

You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:

'''A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:'''
*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)
*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)
*Quantity (the number of objects in the array
#:[[File:Array Linear Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)
*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)
*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)
#:[[File:Array Circular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*X Spacing (horizontal spacing)
*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)
*X Quantity (number of columns)
*Y Quantity (number of rows)
#:[[File:Array Rectangular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the "ungroup" button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that
your objects are properly spaced.

#:[[File:Resize array.PNG|400px]]

=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=

===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===
#To print all faces of the enclosure, go to the '''View''' tab of the toolbar in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:View Print icon.PNG|400px]]
#Click the Print icon.
#:[[File:Print Icon.PNG|100px]]
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.
#:[[File:Print to Scale.PNG|400px]]
#Click '''Print.'''

===To calibrate the printer===
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button.
#A test page opens.
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle.
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens.
#If the printed rectangle is not 3" x 3", then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''. 
 

=Exporting and importing face templates=
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer. 
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.
#Select '''Graphics > Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics > Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image.
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.

Face Editor

2022-05-31T14:16:19Z

Amacdonald: /* Quick Search */

=Face Editor overview=
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.

[[File:Face Editor 1 Face Editor Overview.PNG|1000px|Face Editor Window]] 

[[File:Face Editor 2 Design Toolbar.PNG]] 

;2D Design bar
:Contains Cutout, Graphic, Masking, Reference and Exclusion, with the common drawing types (circle, ellipse, rectangle, path, line, arc, etc).

;2D Tools Bar
:Contains common tools such as move, trim, pattern, measure, dimension, coordinates.

===Face Editor preferences===
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]] in the 3D Viewer. 

=Viewing the face=

Click the View tab in the toolbar to see all of your viewing options.

[[File:View Toolbar.PNG]]

==Zooming==
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following.
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Face Editor Zoom In.PNG|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Face Editor Zoom Out.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.
:*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' > '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom. 
*To zoom in on a particular area:
*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom. 

==Resetting the view==
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Face Editor Reset View.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.
*Choose '''View''' > '''Reset View'''. 

==Viewing the front or back of the face==
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, click '''Back'' in the View Tab. 
[[File:Viewing the Front or the Back of the face front and back.PNG|200px]] 

=Coordinate System=
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.

[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]] 

===Choosing the Units of Measure===

You can set the default unit of measure.

#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM).
#Click '''OK.''' 

=Quick Search=
Instead of using the Library Manager to find the specific item you want to place, you can use the Quick Search tab to quickly find and place an item from our Library. 
[[File:Quick Search initial screen.PNG|800px]]
*Use the drop-down menu to search for the item you're looking for. Be as specific as possible.
[[File:Quick Search finding fastener.PNG|800px]]
*Select the item and click the button labelled 'Place Item'.
[[File:Quick Search Place Item.PNG|800px]]
*This tool can be especially useful for finding a specific fastener you need, by searching the part number.
 

=Drawing shapes=

==Selecting the drawing (object) type==
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''. 
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the "Mode" label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''. 
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]] 
 

===Using the Cutout object type===
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]] 

===Using the Graphic object type===
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.

====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press <Enter>. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.).
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is "None"; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads.
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish.
:*The printed area must be no more than 46"x46", and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24" high.
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed. 

=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Preferences'''.
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to "Graphic" for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.)
#Click '''OK'''. 

=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change.
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu.
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]] 

===Using the Exclusion object type===
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.

===Using the Masking object type===
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust. 
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked. 
'''Notes''' 
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1". 

===Using the Construct object type===
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production. 

==Drawing circles==
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing ellipses==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing rectangles and squares==
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing custom paths==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape. 

====Creating an arc using the Path tool====
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment).
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press <a>.
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer.
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size.
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing <A>).
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.) 

====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.

'''''To merge two or more objects'''''
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object.
#:[[File:Merge two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.)
#:[[File:Merge Select Objects.PNG]]
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu.
#:[[File:Merge Right Click and choose Merge.PNG]]
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout.
#:[[File:Merged into single cutout.PNG]] 
'''''To edit a merged object''''' 
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.
:[[File:Edit a Merged Object.PNG]] [[File:Merge move node of object.PNG]] 
'''Note''' If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. 
'''''To trim two or more objects''''' 
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.
#Place a circle on the face.
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it.
#:[[File:Trim two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.
#:[[File:Trim Select both objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Trim''' button.
#:[[File:Trim button.PNG]]
#:The outline of each object is outlined.
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]
#Use your cursor to eliminate the lines you do not want.
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode. '''Important!''' If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved. 
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such.
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]] 
'''See Also: '''
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]

====Solving problems with merging objects====
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.
 
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom: 
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]] 
If you then merge them and click <Esc>, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view.
 
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic.
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle.
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well.
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]
#When completed, click the <Esc> key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly. 

==Drawing lines==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.
#Drag to set the end of the line.
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing arcs==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc.
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc.
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc.
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Adding text==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.
#Click on the face and begin typing.
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''<Enter>''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time.
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''', and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''. 

====Adding special characters====
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.

There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.

If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows.
#Copy the character.
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:
#;[[File:Adding special characters.PNG|border|500px]]
#:'''Tip''' The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:
#;[[File:Registered trademark symbol text field of its own.PNG|500px]] 

'''See Also''' 
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]''' 

==Adding images==
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed. 
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/ '''Spotting the Difference''']. 
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed.
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.)
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received.
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves.
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.
'''Notes''': 
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit->Preferences->Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer.
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins.
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text->Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the "ghost" image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as "Plain SVG". This should allow the SVG image to import.
 
====Exporting images====
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export.
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens.
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. 

==Importing fonts==
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.
#Select '''Import font'''.
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.
'''Notes''':
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it.
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts.
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''

=Using the Measure tool=
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]] 

==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool initial selection of objects.PNG|600px]] 
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Move''' tool or press <Esc>. 

==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.
#Click the centre of the circle cutout.
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500px]]
#Enter "5" in '''x difference''' and "-3" in '''y difference'''.
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)
 

==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500 px]]
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of "1" and an '''x difference''' of "1".
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel. 

==Displaying measurements==
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes. 
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points''''' 
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Dimension Button.PNG|75px|bottom]]
#:The distance of "0.000" is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint.
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor.
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed.
#:[[File:Measure and display the distance between two points actual.PNG|500px]]
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green.
#:[[File:Green circle drawn around the snap-to point.PNG||500px]]
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:
#::The distance between the two points;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure.
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed. The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle.
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse.
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way.
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - 0 position.PNG|500px]]
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - near object.PNG|500px]]
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - snap point.PNG|500px]] 

'''''To delete a displayed measurement''''' 
Do either of the following:
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu.
*Highlight the line and press the <Delete> key. 

=Using the grid=
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects. 

Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel.

===Turn on/off the Grid===
#In the View tab, go the Grid section
#[[File:Snap to Grid.PNG|200px]]
#*Click the Show checkbox to show the Grid.
[[File:Turn on-off the grid Show grid.PNG|600px]]

===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===
#To have your objects snap to the Grid:
#*Click the Snap checkbox 

===Changing grid size and offset===
#On the View tab of the toolbar, click the Size icon [[File:Changing Grid Size icon.PNG|bottom]] in the Grid section.
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:
:[[File:Changing Grid Size.PNG|300px]]
 
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}
[[File:Grid with 1 in width and height, 1 in offset width and offset height.PNG|500px]]
 

=Managing object properties=

[[File:Top of Properties Panel.PNG|thumb|Properties panel view]]

[[File:Object Type needs to be called Path Type.PNG|thumb]]

===Top of Properties Panel===
[[File:Top of Properties Panel A.PNG]]
* The Properties Panel has the following tabs: Properties, Notes, Layers, Mode Help

*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.

===Fill===
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.

===Line Thickness===
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.

===Color===
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu.

===Type===
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.
* Object types include:
:Cutout
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)
:Exclusion
:Construct

===Origin===
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:
:'''Circles''' -- centre
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner
:'''Paths''' -- start point
:'''Lines''' -- start point
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner 
'''See Also''' 
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]

===Circles===
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.
===Ellipses===
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).
===Rectangles===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Lines===
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.
===Images===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Text===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.

===Path===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise 

==Adding notes==
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering & Design Services team. For example:
* "Notch in this bend."
* "Put a hinged door over this cutout."
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering & Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering & Design Services will give you the correct quote. 
'''''To add a note to an object'''''
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note.
#Go to the Notes tab in the Properties Panel to create a new note. Click the Green + Button to create a new note.
#;[[File:Notes Tab.PNG|500px]]
#;Enter your note, then click OK.
#;[[File:Add New Note.PNG|500px]]
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time. 
'''''To add a general note'''''
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' button.
#;[[File:To add a general note.PNG|500px]]
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it. 
'''''To delete a note'''''
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button. 
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View > View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance.
#:[[File:Review All notes.PNG|500 px]]
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected. 

=Adding cutouts=
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure. 
'''See Also:''' 
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]] 

===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutouts''' from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#;[[File:Cutout Library.PNG|150px]]
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description.
#;[[File:Adding a cutout by browsing the cutout library.PNG|500px]]
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout.
#;[[File:Click the Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.
#;[[File:Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process. 

==Adding "D" port cutouts==
You can add a "D"-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel.
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it.
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]] 

==Adding a circular gauge==
You can add a circular gauge graphic, which is a circle or arc shape with numbered notches, according to your requirements.
#In the Face Editor, choose ''' Place Circular Gauge ''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it.
#Once the circular gauge is placed, click ''' Move Item ''' or press Escape so that your circular gauge is selected.
#You can customize the circular gauge to your requirements, including color, line thickness, number of ticks, angle, label and more.

=Adding hardware=
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles.

==Adding self-clinching fasteners==
Protocase uses PEM® brand self-clinching fasteners.
#In the Face Editor, choose Fasteners from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#:[[File:Adding Self Clinching Fasteners.PNG|300px]]
#:The Fasteners section of the Library Manager opens.
#:[[File:Library Manager self clinching fasteners.PNG|500px]]
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)
#Select the thread '''Length'''.
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed.
#Select a '''Part Number'''.
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature. 
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with "ZI".) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones.
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.
#:Place the fastener on the face.
#:[[File:Self Clinching Fastener Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Move''' button or press the '''Esc''' key.
#:[[File:Self clinching fasteners in 3D viewer.PNG|500px]] 
'''See Also''': 
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']] 

==Adding hardware such as handles==
#In the '''Library''' drop-down menu, click '''Hardware'''
#:[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px]]
#Browse the hardware items to find the item you need.
#:[[File:Library Manager Hardware.PNG|500px]]
#Select the hardware item you want to use, and click '''Place This Item'''
#Place item on the face where you want it.
#Click Save to view your design in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:Hardware Handles 3D viewer.PNG|500px]]

==Adding Rubber Feet==
#On the Library drop-down menu in the right corner, select Hardware and click '''GO'''.
#;[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px|]]
#Choose the folder labelled '''Rubber Feet'''. Select the rubber foot you require: Large Rubber Foot, Medium Rubber Foot, Small Rubber Foot or Tapered (which is attached via adhesive).
#;[[File:Library Manager Rubber Feet.PNG|600px|]]
#Click '''Place This Item''' to place the rubber foot in your desired location.
#In order to have a stable enclosure, you will then need to place the same rubber foot in the other three corners of your enclosure.
#;[[File:Rubber Feet Placed in Face Editor.PNG|600px|]]
#The Protocase Engineering team recommends placing each rubber foot at least 0.5 or 1 inch away from the edges of your enclosure. If your enclosure is very large, you may go even farther from the edge if required.
#;[[File:Medium Rubber feet in 3D viewer.PNG|600px|]]

==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==
====Adding a countersink to a face====
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole.
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Adding a countersink to a face.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of "100.0° #2" indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.
#;[[File:Countersink Metal Thickness.PNG|600px]]
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png|200px]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera. 

====Adding a tapped hole to a face====
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole.
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Tapped Hole.PNG|500px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of "2-56 [0.07]" indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07" for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.)
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face. 
#:[[File:Tapped Hole solid circle with partial circle around it.PNG]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.
 

====Adding screws to a face====
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''.
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener. 

====Replacing screws and PEMs====
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the fastener. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it.
#Right-click and select '''Replace PEMs''' from the menu that displays.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs right click.PNG|300px]]
#The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the fastener you wish to use, and then click the '''Place This Item'' to select this fastener instead of the existing one.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs choose new fastener.PNG|600px]]

==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure. 
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''
#Click '''New'''.
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens.
#:[[File:Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly click new.PNG|250 px]]
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary.
#:[[File:Choose the bracket you want to customize.PNG|600 px]]
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button.
#:The 3D View window opens.
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the left hand panel.
#You will be prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure).
#:The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:Sub-assembly dialog.PNG|500 px]]
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is "L Bracket by Base - Bottom". ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''
#:'''Part Number'''
#:'''Description'''
#Click '''OK.'''
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu. 
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face. 

'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure.
#Click the '''Place Item''' button.
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon.
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.
#Specify how you would like your sub-assembly attached: '''welding, self-clinching fasteners or other'''.
#Whether you choose welding or self-clinching fasteners, please provide as many specific details as you can. (Ex: specify the type of welding you would like, such as tack weld, plug weld, etc).
# For self-clinching fasteners, please provide as much detail as to what fastener you would like used. Ex: nuts, studs or standoffs. Include all of the key information, including part number, thread size and length. If you do not have a specific preference, please advise our Engineering & Design Services team that they may choose the most logical option.
#Choose "other" if you'd prefer to attach your sub-assembly yourself once you receive the completed order.
#'''Note''': Once you order your design, our Engineering & Design Services team may contact you if they require more information or need to clarify details.
#View video tutorial about sub-assemblies: https://youtu.be/XciURDevnXA
 

=Adding Graphics from the Graphics Library=

The Graphics Library allows you to place common symbols and graphics, such as USB, Electrical Ground and Caution.
#Once in the Face Editor, you can access the Library by selecting Graphics from the drop-down Library menu in the top corner.
#[[File:Graphics from Graphics Library.PNG|400px]]
#The Graphics library is organized by category: Electronic Symbols, Flags, Marks, Warning & Caution Symbols and Other. Click on the Category to expand the list and see all of the graphic symbols available.
#[[File:Library manager Graphics Library.PNG|600px]]
#Once you’ve found the graphic symbol you want to place on your design, click the symbol name and then click Place This Item. Resize and relocate the graphics symbol, just as you would with any other object.

Note: You can also change the color of your symbol, so long as the symbol you’ve placed is only one color in nature. (Any symbol that is more than one color, such as Electrostatic Sensitivity, Laser, Pacemaker and Two Person Lift, cannot be altered with different colors. Flag graphics' colors also cannot be changed).

=Adding Components from Library=
Protocase Designer's Library Manager includes a tab for Components, where you can quickly and easily download boards, connectors, drives, fans, heatsinks, LCD screens and power supplies, and then place on you rdesign.

==Add Components from Library==
#Once in the Face Editor, select Components from the Library drop-down menu in the top-right corner.
#You will see a small dialog box open that says Syncing Library. This This is an important step for being able to access all of the parts of the Library Manager.
#Click on tab labeled "Components." Scroll through the list of categories to find your desired component category type.
#Click on the component you wish to use. In order to access the component, you will need to download it to your local copy of Protocase Designer. Click Download.
#Once the component file has been downloaded, you will see three buttons: Place this item, Export to File and Create Personal Copy.
#Once you click Place this item, you will be prompted to choose your mounting fasteners, in the exact same way that you would see when you are importing your own STEP file of a component in your design.

==Save a Personal Copy of a Component in Your Library==
#If you want to save a copy of a component from the library with your desired fasteners, stay in the Face Editor.
#Click on the component you've placed with fasteners. Once it is selected, you will see a button on the right-hand menu called "Add to Library". Once you click this button, you will be prompted to edit the properties, including adding a personalized name for the component.
#Once you click OK, the grouped component will be saved in your personal library. You can access it and place it on your design by clicking the Personal tab in the Library Manager.

==Contribute to the Library Manager==
#You may save a cutout, graphic or component from your Personal Library and contribute it to the Public Library.
#Click the Add to Public Library button. Select the applicable category and sub-category, then click submit.
#The Protocase Designer team moderates the submissions - which can take 1-2 business days.
#Once your submission is cleared, the cutout, graphic or component you've added will show up in the public library.
#Remember – you should only add items to the public library if you want it to be accessible to others. Proprietary items for your organization should be kept to your own personal library.

=Importing Components=
You can import STEP or DXF components of circuit boards, fans and other accessories.

==Importing STEP Files==
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, in the right-hand corner, select '''Import 3D Component''' from the Import/Export Dropdown Menu.
#:[[File:1 Import Export Drop down Go.PNG|400px]]
#Protocase Designer will open a browser window so you can select the STEP file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#If your file is very large, Protocase Designer will display a loading warning. If the software takes longer than a minute or two to import your component, you may need to simplify the STEP file before importing it.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#:[[File:2 Component Choose Mating Face.PNG|600px]]
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
[[File:4 PEM Editor Dialog.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''Place Fasteners''' to open the Fasteners library. Choose the fastener you'd like to place.
#:[[File:5 Choose Fasteners and click Place This Item.PNG|600px]]
#Place the fastener in the appropriate mounting holes.
#:[[File:6 Place the Fastener where you want the component mounted.PNG|600px]]
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:7 once youve clicked Save to save your changes, you will see your component with fasteners in the Face Editor on your model.PNG|600px]]
 

==Importing DXF Files==
#Importing a DXF file of a component follows many of the same steps as importing a STEP file, with a few additional steps required.
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, under Imports, click Component. Protocase designer will open a browser window so you can select the DXF file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#Once Protocase Designer detects it is a DXF file being imported, an additional window will display that will allow you to customize how the DXF will be imported.
##Layers: DXF files contain many layers, and Protocase Designer cannot detect which layers actually need to be used. Use this tool to select which layers of your DXF you'd like to import.
##Thickness: Protocase Designer cannot automatically detect the thickness of your DXF file, so you can use this tool to set your thickness. Two important things to note – the thickness value is in inches – and your thickness choice will not be visible until the component is displayed in Protocase Designer’s 3D Editor.
##Units: Protocase Designer cannot currently detect units in DXF files (we are working on this!), so you will need to change the expected units. You can view the over bounds, which are displayed in inches. If you change the unit of measurement, the software will update the over bounds automatically. If your ideal unit of measurement is not listed as an option, you will need to convert the DXF’s units to inches before importing into Protocase Designer.
[[File:1 DXF Properties Selection.PNG|600px]]
#Once you have addressed Layers, Thickness and Units and made your desired changes, click the Accept button to save your changes and close the import tool. Protocase Designer will use the data you entered to generate a component from the DXF file you originally imported.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
(Tip: Make sure "Snap to Grid" is turned off, as it will allow you to place your fasteners precisely where you require them).
[[File:File:2 DXF Place Fasteners.PNG|600px]]
#Click the checkmark to save your changes.
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:3 DXF in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

==Changing Your Mounting Fasteners==
#Because you placed your mounting self-clinching fasteners in the Secondary Face Editor (as recommended), Protocase Designer makes your components and the fasteners a grouped object.
#Select your component (which is a grouped object with your fasteners). In the right-hand menu, click Edit.
#You will return to the Secondary Face Editor, where you can select and delete the fasteners you previously chose, and add in new ones as needed.

==Use Component Projection==
#Use the Component Projection feature to view an outline of your components when editing other faces in your Protocase Designer assembly.
#Once in the Face Editor, click on the View tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:View tab in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]
#In the Components section, click the '''Show Outline''' checkbox.
#:[[File:View Tab in Face Editor Component Projection Outline.PNG|300px]]
#To control the amount of detail shown in your component projection outline, use the slider. Far left means very little detail. The farther to the right you go, the level of detail increases.
#:[[File:Component Projection in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

=Manipulating objects=
==Selecting object(s)==
#On the '''Design''' tab in the Face Editor toolbar, select the '''Move''' tool. [[File:tool -edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]
#Do one of the following:
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.
#*To select multiple objects:
#**Click the first object, then down the <Shift> key and click the other objects; or
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects.
#:[[File:Selecting Objects.PNG|600px]]
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.
#:[[File:Light Blue box is drawn.PNG|300px]]

==Editing object(s)==
'''''To edit a single object''''' 
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''.
''or''
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type.
 
'''''To edit a group''''' 
*To edit a group, you must right-click to ungroup the items, then edit the object(s) individually. If you wish, you can right-click to make the objects a group once more.

==Moving object(s)==
To move a single object: 
#Select the object.
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location. 

To move several objects: 
#Select all the objects.
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location. 

To move cutouts from one face to another:
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items.
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with.
:For detailed instructions, see:
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]] 

==Locking item(s)==
To lock a single object:
#Select the object.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the item.
#:[[File:Locking items.PNG|600px]]
 
To Lock several objects:
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the items. 

==Grouping and ungrouping objects==
'''''To group objects'''''

#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the <Shift> key and select each object.
#Right click and select Group from the menu that displays.
#:[[File:1 Right click to Group Objects.PNG|400px]]
#Your objects are now grouped as one single object, which you can move around on the face of your model.
#:[[File:1 Grouped Object.PNG|400px]]
 
'''''To ungroup objects'''''
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.
#Click the group.
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel. 
'''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement. 
'''See Also'''
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]] 

==Aligning and distributing objects==
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.

#Select 2 or more objects.
#With the objects selected, right click and select either Align or Distribute the menu. 
#:[[File:Align Objects with objects selected.PNG|500px]]
'''Alignment''' 
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects 
 
'''''Notes:'''''
*Objects align to the first object selected.
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.

'''Distribute''' 
#:[[File:Distribute Horizontally.PNG|500px]]

[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops 
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects 

==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==
#You can find the cut, copy, paste, undo and redo functions in the '''Edit''' section of the Design tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:Cutting copying and pasting objects buttons.PNG|200px]]
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button.
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button.
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor.
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Move''' tool or press the <Esc> key when you are done. 

Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] buttons in the Edit section of the toolbar. 

==Adding and managing layers==
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.

'''Layer Toolbar'''

Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list.
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.)
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer.

'''''To add a new layer '''''
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel.
#:[[File:Adding and managing layers.PNG|300px]]
#:The Input dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer.

'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed.
#Paste the object(s).

'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list. 

==Using the Array Tool==
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool,
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects.

'''To create an array:'''
#Click the "Edit Face" button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.
#With the object highlighted, select the "Pattern" tool in the Design tab of the toolbar.
#:[[File:Array pattern icon.PNG|100px]]
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)
#:[[File:Select Array Type.PNG|200px]]

You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:

'''A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:'''
*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)
*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)
*Quantity (the number of objects in the array
#:[[File:Array Linear Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)
*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)
*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)
#:[[File:Array Circular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*X Spacing (horizontal spacing)
*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)
*X Quantity (number of columns)
*Y Quantity (number of rows)
#:[[File:Array Rectangular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the "ungroup" button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that
your objects are properly spaced.

#:[[File:Resize array.PNG|400px]]

=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=

===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===
#To print all faces of the enclosure, go to the '''View''' tab of the toolbar in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:View Print icon.PNG|400px]]
#Click the Print icon.
#:[[File:Print Icon.PNG|100px]]
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.
#:[[File:Print to Scale.PNG|400px]]
#Click '''Print.'''

===To calibrate the printer===
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button.
#A test page opens.
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle.
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens.
#If the printed rectangle is not 3" x 3", then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''. 
 

=Exporting and importing face templates=
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer. 
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.
#Select '''Graphics > Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics > Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image.
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.

Face Editor

2022-05-31T14:16:06Z

Amacdonald: /* Quick Search */

=Face Editor overview=
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.

[[File:Face Editor 1 Face Editor Overview.PNG|1000px|Face Editor Window]] 

[[File:Face Editor 2 Design Toolbar.PNG]] 

;2D Design bar
:Contains Cutout, Graphic, Masking, Reference and Exclusion, with the common drawing types (circle, ellipse, rectangle, path, line, arc, etc).

;2D Tools Bar
:Contains common tools such as move, trim, pattern, measure, dimension, coordinates.

===Face Editor preferences===
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]] in the 3D Viewer. 

=Viewing the face=

Click the View tab in the toolbar to see all of your viewing options.

[[File:View Toolbar.PNG]]

==Zooming==
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following.
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Face Editor Zoom In.PNG|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Face Editor Zoom Out.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.
:*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' > '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom. 
*To zoom in on a particular area:
*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom. 

==Resetting the view==
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Face Editor Reset View.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.
*Choose '''View''' > '''Reset View'''. 

==Viewing the front or back of the face==
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, click '''Back'' in the View Tab. 
[[File:Viewing the Front or the Back of the face front and back.PNG|200px]] 

=Coordinate System=
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.

[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]] 

===Choosing the Units of Measure===

You can set the default unit of measure.

#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM).
#Click '''OK.''' 

=Quick Search=
Instead of using the Library Manager to find the specific item you want to place, you can use the Quick Search tab to quickly find and place an item from our Library. 
[[File:Quick Search initial screen.PNG|800px]]
*Use the drop-down menu to search for the item you're looking for. Be as specific as possible.
[[File:Quick Search finding fastener.PNG]]
*Select the item and click the button labelled 'Place Item'.
[[File:Quick Search Place Item.PNG]]
*This tool can be especially useful for finding a specific fastener you need, by searching the part number.
 

=Drawing shapes=

==Selecting the drawing (object) type==
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''. 
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the "Mode" label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''. 
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]] 
 

===Using the Cutout object type===
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]] 

===Using the Graphic object type===
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.

====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press <Enter>. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.).
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is "None"; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads.
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish.
:*The printed area must be no more than 46"x46", and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24" high.
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed. 

=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Preferences'''.
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to "Graphic" for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.)
#Click '''OK'''. 

=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change.
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu.
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]] 

===Using the Exclusion object type===
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.

===Using the Masking object type===
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust. 
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked. 
'''Notes''' 
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1". 

===Using the Construct object type===
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production. 

==Drawing circles==
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing ellipses==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing rectangles and squares==
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing custom paths==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape. 

====Creating an arc using the Path tool====
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment).
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press <a>.
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer.
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size.
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing <A>).
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.) 

====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.

'''''To merge two or more objects'''''
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object.
#:[[File:Merge two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.)
#:[[File:Merge Select Objects.PNG]]
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu.
#:[[File:Merge Right Click and choose Merge.PNG]]
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout.
#:[[File:Merged into single cutout.PNG]] 
'''''To edit a merged object''''' 
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.
:[[File:Edit a Merged Object.PNG]] [[File:Merge move node of object.PNG]] 
'''Note''' If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. 
'''''To trim two or more objects''''' 
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.
#Place a circle on the face.
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it.
#:[[File:Trim two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.
#:[[File:Trim Select both objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Trim''' button.
#:[[File:Trim button.PNG]]
#:The outline of each object is outlined.
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]
#Use your cursor to eliminate the lines you do not want.
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode. '''Important!''' If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved. 
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such.
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]] 
'''See Also: '''
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]

====Solving problems with merging objects====
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.
 
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom: 
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]] 
If you then merge them and click <Esc>, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view.
 
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic.
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle.
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well.
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]
#When completed, click the <Esc> key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly. 

==Drawing lines==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.
#Drag to set the end of the line.
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing arcs==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc.
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc.
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc.
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Adding text==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.
#Click on the face and begin typing.
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''<Enter>''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time.
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''', and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''. 

====Adding special characters====
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.

There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.

If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows.
#Copy the character.
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:
#;[[File:Adding special characters.PNG|border|500px]]
#:'''Tip''' The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:
#;[[File:Registered trademark symbol text field of its own.PNG|500px]] 

'''See Also''' 
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]''' 

==Adding images==
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed. 
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/ '''Spotting the Difference''']. 
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed.
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.)
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received.
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves.
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.
'''Notes''': 
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit->Preferences->Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer.
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins.
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text->Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the "ghost" image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as "Plain SVG". This should allow the SVG image to import.
 
====Exporting images====
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export.
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens.
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. 

==Importing fonts==
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.
#Select '''Import font'''.
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.
'''Notes''':
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it.
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts.
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''

=Using the Measure tool=
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]] 

==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool initial selection of objects.PNG|600px]] 
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Move''' tool or press <Esc>. 

==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.
#Click the centre of the circle cutout.
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500px]]
#Enter "5" in '''x difference''' and "-3" in '''y difference'''.
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)
 

==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500 px]]
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of "1" and an '''x difference''' of "1".
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel. 

==Displaying measurements==
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes. 
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points''''' 
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Dimension Button.PNG|75px|bottom]]
#:The distance of "0.000" is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint.
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor.
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed.
#:[[File:Measure and display the distance between two points actual.PNG|500px]]
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green.
#:[[File:Green circle drawn around the snap-to point.PNG||500px]]
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:
#::The distance between the two points;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure.
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed. The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle.
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse.
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way.
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - 0 position.PNG|500px]]
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - near object.PNG|500px]]
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - snap point.PNG|500px]] 

'''''To delete a displayed measurement''''' 
Do either of the following:
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu.
*Highlight the line and press the <Delete> key. 

=Using the grid=
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects. 

Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel.

===Turn on/off the Grid===
#In the View tab, go the Grid section
#[[File:Snap to Grid.PNG|200px]]
#*Click the Show checkbox to show the Grid.
[[File:Turn on-off the grid Show grid.PNG|600px]]

===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===
#To have your objects snap to the Grid:
#*Click the Snap checkbox 

===Changing grid size and offset===
#On the View tab of the toolbar, click the Size icon [[File:Changing Grid Size icon.PNG|bottom]] in the Grid section.
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:
:[[File:Changing Grid Size.PNG|300px]]
 
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}
[[File:Grid with 1 in width and height, 1 in offset width and offset height.PNG|500px]]
 

=Managing object properties=

[[File:Top of Properties Panel.PNG|thumb|Properties panel view]]

[[File:Object Type needs to be called Path Type.PNG|thumb]]

===Top of Properties Panel===
[[File:Top of Properties Panel A.PNG]]
* The Properties Panel has the following tabs: Properties, Notes, Layers, Mode Help

*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.

===Fill===
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.

===Line Thickness===
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.

===Color===
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu.

===Type===
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.
* Object types include:
:Cutout
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)
:Exclusion
:Construct

===Origin===
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:
:'''Circles''' -- centre
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner
:'''Paths''' -- start point
:'''Lines''' -- start point
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner 
'''See Also''' 
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]

===Circles===
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.
===Ellipses===
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).
===Rectangles===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Lines===
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.
===Images===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Text===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.

===Path===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise 

==Adding notes==
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering & Design Services team. For example:
* "Notch in this bend."
* "Put a hinged door over this cutout."
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering & Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering & Design Services will give you the correct quote. 
'''''To add a note to an object'''''
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note.
#Go to the Notes tab in the Properties Panel to create a new note. Click the Green + Button to create a new note.
#;[[File:Notes Tab.PNG|500px]]
#;Enter your note, then click OK.
#;[[File:Add New Note.PNG|500px]]
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time. 
'''''To add a general note'''''
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' button.
#;[[File:To add a general note.PNG|500px]]
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it. 
'''''To delete a note'''''
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button. 
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View > View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance.
#:[[File:Review All notes.PNG|500 px]]
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected. 

=Adding cutouts=
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure. 
'''See Also:''' 
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]] 

===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutouts''' from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#;[[File:Cutout Library.PNG|150px]]
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description.
#;[[File:Adding a cutout by browsing the cutout library.PNG|500px]]
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout.
#;[[File:Click the Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.
#;[[File:Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process. 

==Adding "D" port cutouts==
You can add a "D"-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel.
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it.
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]] 

==Adding a circular gauge==
You can add a circular gauge graphic, which is a circle or arc shape with numbered notches, according to your requirements.
#In the Face Editor, choose ''' Place Circular Gauge ''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it.
#Once the circular gauge is placed, click ''' Move Item ''' or press Escape so that your circular gauge is selected.
#You can customize the circular gauge to your requirements, including color, line thickness, number of ticks, angle, label and more.

=Adding hardware=
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles.

==Adding self-clinching fasteners==
Protocase uses PEM® brand self-clinching fasteners.
#In the Face Editor, choose Fasteners from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#:[[File:Adding Self Clinching Fasteners.PNG|300px]]
#:The Fasteners section of the Library Manager opens.
#:[[File:Library Manager self clinching fasteners.PNG|500px]]
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)
#Select the thread '''Length'''.
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed.
#Select a '''Part Number'''.
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature. 
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with "ZI".) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones.
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.
#:Place the fastener on the face.
#:[[File:Self Clinching Fastener Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Move''' button or press the '''Esc''' key.
#:[[File:Self clinching fasteners in 3D viewer.PNG|500px]] 
'''See Also''': 
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']] 

==Adding hardware such as handles==
#In the '''Library''' drop-down menu, click '''Hardware'''
#:[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px]]
#Browse the hardware items to find the item you need.
#:[[File:Library Manager Hardware.PNG|500px]]
#Select the hardware item you want to use, and click '''Place This Item'''
#Place item on the face where you want it.
#Click Save to view your design in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:Hardware Handles 3D viewer.PNG|500px]]

==Adding Rubber Feet==
#On the Library drop-down menu in the right corner, select Hardware and click '''GO'''.
#;[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px|]]
#Choose the folder labelled '''Rubber Feet'''. Select the rubber foot you require: Large Rubber Foot, Medium Rubber Foot, Small Rubber Foot or Tapered (which is attached via adhesive).
#;[[File:Library Manager Rubber Feet.PNG|600px|]]
#Click '''Place This Item''' to place the rubber foot in your desired location.
#In order to have a stable enclosure, you will then need to place the same rubber foot in the other three corners of your enclosure.
#;[[File:Rubber Feet Placed in Face Editor.PNG|600px|]]
#The Protocase Engineering team recommends placing each rubber foot at least 0.5 or 1 inch away from the edges of your enclosure. If your enclosure is very large, you may go even farther from the edge if required.
#;[[File:Medium Rubber feet in 3D viewer.PNG|600px|]]

==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==
====Adding a countersink to a face====
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole.
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Adding a countersink to a face.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of "100.0° #2" indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.
#;[[File:Countersink Metal Thickness.PNG|600px]]
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png|200px]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera. 

====Adding a tapped hole to a face====
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole.
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Tapped Hole.PNG|500px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of "2-56 [0.07]" indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07" for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.)
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face. 
#:[[File:Tapped Hole solid circle with partial circle around it.PNG]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.
 

====Adding screws to a face====
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''.
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener. 

====Replacing screws and PEMs====
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the fastener. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it.
#Right-click and select '''Replace PEMs''' from the menu that displays.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs right click.PNG|300px]]
#The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the fastener you wish to use, and then click the '''Place This Item'' to select this fastener instead of the existing one.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs choose new fastener.PNG|600px]]

==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure. 
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''
#Click '''New'''.
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens.
#:[[File:Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly click new.PNG|250 px]]
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary.
#:[[File:Choose the bracket you want to customize.PNG|600 px]]
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button.
#:The 3D View window opens.
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the left hand panel.
#You will be prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure).
#:The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:Sub-assembly dialog.PNG|500 px]]
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is "L Bracket by Base - Bottom". ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''
#:'''Part Number'''
#:'''Description'''
#Click '''OK.'''
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu. 
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face. 

'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure.
#Click the '''Place Item''' button.
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon.
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.
#Specify how you would like your sub-assembly attached: '''welding, self-clinching fasteners or other'''.
#Whether you choose welding or self-clinching fasteners, please provide as many specific details as you can. (Ex: specify the type of welding you would like, such as tack weld, plug weld, etc).
# For self-clinching fasteners, please provide as much detail as to what fastener you would like used. Ex: nuts, studs or standoffs. Include all of the key information, including part number, thread size and length. If you do not have a specific preference, please advise our Engineering & Design Services team that they may choose the most logical option.
#Choose "other" if you'd prefer to attach your sub-assembly yourself once you receive the completed order.
#'''Note''': Once you order your design, our Engineering & Design Services team may contact you if they require more information or need to clarify details.
#View video tutorial about sub-assemblies: https://youtu.be/XciURDevnXA
 

=Adding Graphics from the Graphics Library=

The Graphics Library allows you to place common symbols and graphics, such as USB, Electrical Ground and Caution.
#Once in the Face Editor, you can access the Library by selecting Graphics from the drop-down Library menu in the top corner.
#[[File:Graphics from Graphics Library.PNG|400px]]
#The Graphics library is organized by category: Electronic Symbols, Flags, Marks, Warning & Caution Symbols and Other. Click on the Category to expand the list and see all of the graphic symbols available.
#[[File:Library manager Graphics Library.PNG|600px]]
#Once you’ve found the graphic symbol you want to place on your design, click the symbol name and then click Place This Item. Resize and relocate the graphics symbol, just as you would with any other object.

Note: You can also change the color of your symbol, so long as the symbol you’ve placed is only one color in nature. (Any symbol that is more than one color, such as Electrostatic Sensitivity, Laser, Pacemaker and Two Person Lift, cannot be altered with different colors. Flag graphics' colors also cannot be changed).

=Adding Components from Library=
Protocase Designer's Library Manager includes a tab for Components, where you can quickly and easily download boards, connectors, drives, fans, heatsinks, LCD screens and power supplies, and then place on you rdesign.

==Add Components from Library==
#Once in the Face Editor, select Components from the Library drop-down menu in the top-right corner.
#You will see a small dialog box open that says Syncing Library. This This is an important step for being able to access all of the parts of the Library Manager.
#Click on tab labeled "Components." Scroll through the list of categories to find your desired component category type.
#Click on the component you wish to use. In order to access the component, you will need to download it to your local copy of Protocase Designer. Click Download.
#Once the component file has been downloaded, you will see three buttons: Place this item, Export to File and Create Personal Copy.
#Once you click Place this item, you will be prompted to choose your mounting fasteners, in the exact same way that you would see when you are importing your own STEP file of a component in your design.

==Save a Personal Copy of a Component in Your Library==
#If you want to save a copy of a component from the library with your desired fasteners, stay in the Face Editor.
#Click on the component you've placed with fasteners. Once it is selected, you will see a button on the right-hand menu called "Add to Library". Once you click this button, you will be prompted to edit the properties, including adding a personalized name for the component.
#Once you click OK, the grouped component will be saved in your personal library. You can access it and place it on your design by clicking the Personal tab in the Library Manager.

==Contribute to the Library Manager==
#You may save a cutout, graphic or component from your Personal Library and contribute it to the Public Library.
#Click the Add to Public Library button. Select the applicable category and sub-category, then click submit.
#The Protocase Designer team moderates the submissions - which can take 1-2 business days.
#Once your submission is cleared, the cutout, graphic or component you've added will show up in the public library.
#Remember – you should only add items to the public library if you want it to be accessible to others. Proprietary items for your organization should be kept to your own personal library.

=Importing Components=
You can import STEP or DXF components of circuit boards, fans and other accessories.

==Importing STEP Files==
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, in the right-hand corner, select '''Import 3D Component''' from the Import/Export Dropdown Menu.
#:[[File:1 Import Export Drop down Go.PNG|400px]]
#Protocase Designer will open a browser window so you can select the STEP file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#If your file is very large, Protocase Designer will display a loading warning. If the software takes longer than a minute or two to import your component, you may need to simplify the STEP file before importing it.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#:[[File:2 Component Choose Mating Face.PNG|600px]]
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
[[File:4 PEM Editor Dialog.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''Place Fasteners''' to open the Fasteners library. Choose the fastener you'd like to place.
#:[[File:5 Choose Fasteners and click Place This Item.PNG|600px]]
#Place the fastener in the appropriate mounting holes.
#:[[File:6 Place the Fastener where you want the component mounted.PNG|600px]]
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:7 once youve clicked Save to save your changes, you will see your component with fasteners in the Face Editor on your model.PNG|600px]]
 

==Importing DXF Files==
#Importing a DXF file of a component follows many of the same steps as importing a STEP file, with a few additional steps required.
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, under Imports, click Component. Protocase designer will open a browser window so you can select the DXF file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#Once Protocase Designer detects it is a DXF file being imported, an additional window will display that will allow you to customize how the DXF will be imported.
##Layers: DXF files contain many layers, and Protocase Designer cannot detect which layers actually need to be used. Use this tool to select which layers of your DXF you'd like to import.
##Thickness: Protocase Designer cannot automatically detect the thickness of your DXF file, so you can use this tool to set your thickness. Two important things to note – the thickness value is in inches – and your thickness choice will not be visible until the component is displayed in Protocase Designer’s 3D Editor.
##Units: Protocase Designer cannot currently detect units in DXF files (we are working on this!), so you will need to change the expected units. You can view the over bounds, which are displayed in inches. If you change the unit of measurement, the software will update the over bounds automatically. If your ideal unit of measurement is not listed as an option, you will need to convert the DXF’s units to inches before importing into Protocase Designer.
[[File:1 DXF Properties Selection.PNG|600px]]
#Once you have addressed Layers, Thickness and Units and made your desired changes, click the Accept button to save your changes and close the import tool. Protocase Designer will use the data you entered to generate a component from the DXF file you originally imported.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
(Tip: Make sure "Snap to Grid" is turned off, as it will allow you to place your fasteners precisely where you require them).
[[File:File:2 DXF Place Fasteners.PNG|600px]]
#Click the checkmark to save your changes.
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:3 DXF in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

==Changing Your Mounting Fasteners==
#Because you placed your mounting self-clinching fasteners in the Secondary Face Editor (as recommended), Protocase Designer makes your components and the fasteners a grouped object.
#Select your component (which is a grouped object with your fasteners). In the right-hand menu, click Edit.
#You will return to the Secondary Face Editor, where you can select and delete the fasteners you previously chose, and add in new ones as needed.

==Use Component Projection==
#Use the Component Projection feature to view an outline of your components when editing other faces in your Protocase Designer assembly.
#Once in the Face Editor, click on the View tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:View tab in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]
#In the Components section, click the '''Show Outline''' checkbox.
#:[[File:View Tab in Face Editor Component Projection Outline.PNG|300px]]
#To control the amount of detail shown in your component projection outline, use the slider. Far left means very little detail. The farther to the right you go, the level of detail increases.
#:[[File:Component Projection in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

=Manipulating objects=
==Selecting object(s)==
#On the '''Design''' tab in the Face Editor toolbar, select the '''Move''' tool. [[File:tool -edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]
#Do one of the following:
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.
#*To select multiple objects:
#**Click the first object, then down the <Shift> key and click the other objects; or
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects.
#:[[File:Selecting Objects.PNG|600px]]
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.
#:[[File:Light Blue box is drawn.PNG|300px]]

==Editing object(s)==
'''''To edit a single object''''' 
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''.
''or''
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type.
 
'''''To edit a group''''' 
*To edit a group, you must right-click to ungroup the items, then edit the object(s) individually. If you wish, you can right-click to make the objects a group once more.

==Moving object(s)==
To move a single object: 
#Select the object.
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location. 

To move several objects: 
#Select all the objects.
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location. 

To move cutouts from one face to another:
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items.
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with.
:For detailed instructions, see:
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]] 

==Locking item(s)==
To lock a single object:
#Select the object.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the item.
#:[[File:Locking items.PNG|600px]]
 
To Lock several objects:
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the items. 

==Grouping and ungrouping objects==
'''''To group objects'''''

#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the <Shift> key and select each object.
#Right click and select Group from the menu that displays.
#:[[File:1 Right click to Group Objects.PNG|400px]]
#Your objects are now grouped as one single object, which you can move around on the face of your model.
#:[[File:1 Grouped Object.PNG|400px]]
 
'''''To ungroup objects'''''
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.
#Click the group.
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel. 
'''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement. 
'''See Also'''
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]] 

==Aligning and distributing objects==
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.

#Select 2 or more objects.
#With the objects selected, right click and select either Align or Distribute the menu. 
#:[[File:Align Objects with objects selected.PNG|500px]]
'''Alignment''' 
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects 
 
'''''Notes:'''''
*Objects align to the first object selected.
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.

'''Distribute''' 
#:[[File:Distribute Horizontally.PNG|500px]]

[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops 
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects 

==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==
#You can find the cut, copy, paste, undo and redo functions in the '''Edit''' section of the Design tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:Cutting copying and pasting objects buttons.PNG|200px]]
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button.
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button.
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor.
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Move''' tool or press the <Esc> key when you are done. 

Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] buttons in the Edit section of the toolbar. 

==Adding and managing layers==
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.

'''Layer Toolbar'''

Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list.
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.)
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer.

'''''To add a new layer '''''
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel.
#:[[File:Adding and managing layers.PNG|300px]]
#:The Input dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer.

'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed.
#Paste the object(s).

'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list. 

==Using the Array Tool==
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool,
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects.

'''To create an array:'''
#Click the "Edit Face" button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.
#With the object highlighted, select the "Pattern" tool in the Design tab of the toolbar.
#:[[File:Array pattern icon.PNG|100px]]
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)
#:[[File:Select Array Type.PNG|200px]]

You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:

'''A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:'''
*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)
*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)
*Quantity (the number of objects in the array
#:[[File:Array Linear Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)
*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)
*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)
#:[[File:Array Circular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*X Spacing (horizontal spacing)
*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)
*X Quantity (number of columns)
*Y Quantity (number of rows)
#:[[File:Array Rectangular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the "ungroup" button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that
your objects are properly spaced.

#:[[File:Resize array.PNG|400px]]

=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=

===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===
#To print all faces of the enclosure, go to the '''View''' tab of the toolbar in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:View Print icon.PNG|400px]]
#Click the Print icon.
#:[[File:Print Icon.PNG|100px]]
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.
#:[[File:Print to Scale.PNG|400px]]
#Click '''Print.'''

===To calibrate the printer===
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button.
#A test page opens.
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle.
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens.
#If the printed rectangle is not 3" x 3", then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''. 
 

=Exporting and importing face templates=
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer. 
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.
#Select '''Graphics > Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics > Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image.
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.

Face Editor

2022-05-31T14:15:32Z

Amacdonald: /* Choosing the Units of Measure */

=Face Editor overview=
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.

[[File:Face Editor 1 Face Editor Overview.PNG|1000px|Face Editor Window]] 

[[File:Face Editor 2 Design Toolbar.PNG]] 

;2D Design bar
:Contains Cutout, Graphic, Masking, Reference and Exclusion, with the common drawing types (circle, ellipse, rectangle, path, line, arc, etc).

;2D Tools Bar
:Contains common tools such as move, trim, pattern, measure, dimension, coordinates.

===Face Editor preferences===
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]] in the 3D Viewer. 

=Viewing the face=

Click the View tab in the toolbar to see all of your viewing options.

[[File:View Toolbar.PNG]]

==Zooming==
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following.
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Face Editor Zoom In.PNG|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Face Editor Zoom Out.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.
:*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' > '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom. 
*To zoom in on a particular area:
*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom. 

==Resetting the view==
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Face Editor Reset View.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.
*Choose '''View''' > '''Reset View'''. 

==Viewing the front or back of the face==
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, click '''Back'' in the View Tab. 
[[File:Viewing the Front or the Back of the face front and back.PNG|200px]] 

=Coordinate System=
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.

[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]] 

===Choosing the Units of Measure===

You can set the default unit of measure.

#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM).
#Click '''OK.''' 

=Quick Search=
Instead of using the Library Manager to find the specific item you want to place, you can use the Quick Search tab to quickly find and place an item from our Library. 
*Use the drop-down menu to search for the item you're looking for. Be as specific as possible.
*Select the item and click the button labelled 'Place Item'.
*This tool can be especially useful for finding a specific fastener you need, by searching the part number.
[[File:Quick Search initial screen.PNG|800px]] 

=Drawing shapes=

==Selecting the drawing (object) type==
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''. 
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the "Mode" label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''. 
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]] 
 

===Using the Cutout object type===
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]] 

===Using the Graphic object type===
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.

====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press <Enter>. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.).
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is "None"; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads.
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish.
:*The printed area must be no more than 46"x46", and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24" high.
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed. 

=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Preferences'''.
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to "Graphic" for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.)
#Click '''OK'''. 

=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change.
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu.
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]] 

===Using the Exclusion object type===
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.

===Using the Masking object type===
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust. 
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked. 
'''Notes''' 
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1". 

===Using the Construct object type===
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production. 

==Drawing circles==
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing ellipses==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing rectangles and squares==
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing custom paths==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape. 

====Creating an arc using the Path tool====
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment).
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press <a>.
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer.
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size.
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing <A>).
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.) 

====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.

'''''To merge two or more objects'''''
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object.
#:[[File:Merge two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.)
#:[[File:Merge Select Objects.PNG]]
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu.
#:[[File:Merge Right Click and choose Merge.PNG]]
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout.
#:[[File:Merged into single cutout.PNG]] 
'''''To edit a merged object''''' 
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.
:[[File:Edit a Merged Object.PNG]] [[File:Merge move node of object.PNG]] 
'''Note''' If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. 
'''''To trim two or more objects''''' 
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.
#Place a circle on the face.
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it.
#:[[File:Trim two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.
#:[[File:Trim Select both objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Trim''' button.
#:[[File:Trim button.PNG]]
#:The outline of each object is outlined.
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]
#Use your cursor to eliminate the lines you do not want.
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode. '''Important!''' If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved. 
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such.
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]] 
'''See Also: '''
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]

====Solving problems with merging objects====
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.
 
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom: 
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]] 
If you then merge them and click <Esc>, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view.
 
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic.
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle.
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well.
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]
#When completed, click the <Esc> key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly. 

==Drawing lines==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.
#Drag to set the end of the line.
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing arcs==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc.
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc.
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc.
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Adding text==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.
#Click on the face and begin typing.
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''<Enter>''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time.
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''', and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''. 

====Adding special characters====
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.

There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.

If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows.
#Copy the character.
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:
#;[[File:Adding special characters.PNG|border|500px]]
#:'''Tip''' The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:
#;[[File:Registered trademark symbol text field of its own.PNG|500px]] 

'''See Also''' 
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]''' 

==Adding images==
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed. 
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/ '''Spotting the Difference''']. 
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed.
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.)
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received.
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves.
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.
'''Notes''': 
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit->Preferences->Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer.
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins.
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text->Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the "ghost" image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as "Plain SVG". This should allow the SVG image to import.
 
====Exporting images====
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export.
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens.
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. 

==Importing fonts==
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.
#Select '''Import font'''.
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.
'''Notes''':
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it.
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts.
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''

=Using the Measure tool=
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]] 

==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool initial selection of objects.PNG|600px]] 
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Move''' tool or press <Esc>. 

==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.
#Click the centre of the circle cutout.
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500px]]
#Enter "5" in '''x difference''' and "-3" in '''y difference'''.
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)
 

==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500 px]]
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of "1" and an '''x difference''' of "1".
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel. 

==Displaying measurements==
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes. 
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points''''' 
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Dimension Button.PNG|75px|bottom]]
#:The distance of "0.000" is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint.
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor.
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed.
#:[[File:Measure and display the distance between two points actual.PNG|500px]]
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green.
#:[[File:Green circle drawn around the snap-to point.PNG||500px]]
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:
#::The distance between the two points;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure.
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed. The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle.
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse.
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way.
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - 0 position.PNG|500px]]
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - near object.PNG|500px]]
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - snap point.PNG|500px]] 

'''''To delete a displayed measurement''''' 
Do either of the following:
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu.
*Highlight the line and press the <Delete> key. 

=Using the grid=
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects. 

Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel.

===Turn on/off the Grid===
#In the View tab, go the Grid section
#[[File:Snap to Grid.PNG|200px]]
#*Click the Show checkbox to show the Grid.
[[File:Turn on-off the grid Show grid.PNG|600px]]

===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===
#To have your objects snap to the Grid:
#*Click the Snap checkbox 

===Changing grid size and offset===
#On the View tab of the toolbar, click the Size icon [[File:Changing Grid Size icon.PNG|bottom]] in the Grid section.
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:
:[[File:Changing Grid Size.PNG|300px]]
 
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}
[[File:Grid with 1 in width and height, 1 in offset width and offset height.PNG|500px]]
 

=Managing object properties=

[[File:Top of Properties Panel.PNG|thumb|Properties panel view]]

[[File:Object Type needs to be called Path Type.PNG|thumb]]

===Top of Properties Panel===
[[File:Top of Properties Panel A.PNG]]
* The Properties Panel has the following tabs: Properties, Notes, Layers, Mode Help

*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.

===Fill===
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.

===Line Thickness===
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.

===Color===
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu.

===Type===
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.
* Object types include:
:Cutout
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)
:Exclusion
:Construct

===Origin===
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:
:'''Circles''' -- centre
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner
:'''Paths''' -- start point
:'''Lines''' -- start point
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner 
'''See Also''' 
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]

===Circles===
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.
===Ellipses===
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).
===Rectangles===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Lines===
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.
===Images===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Text===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.

===Path===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise 

==Adding notes==
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering & Design Services team. For example:
* "Notch in this bend."
* "Put a hinged door over this cutout."
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering & Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering & Design Services will give you the correct quote. 
'''''To add a note to an object'''''
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note.
#Go to the Notes tab in the Properties Panel to create a new note. Click the Green + Button to create a new note.
#;[[File:Notes Tab.PNG|500px]]
#;Enter your note, then click OK.
#;[[File:Add New Note.PNG|500px]]
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time. 
'''''To add a general note'''''
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' button.
#;[[File:To add a general note.PNG|500px]]
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it. 
'''''To delete a note'''''
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button. 
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View > View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance.
#:[[File:Review All notes.PNG|500 px]]
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected. 

=Adding cutouts=
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure. 
'''See Also:''' 
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]] 

===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutouts''' from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#;[[File:Cutout Library.PNG|150px]]
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description.
#;[[File:Adding a cutout by browsing the cutout library.PNG|500px]]
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout.
#;[[File:Click the Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.
#;[[File:Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process. 

==Adding "D" port cutouts==
You can add a "D"-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel.
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it.
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]] 

==Adding a circular gauge==
You can add a circular gauge graphic, which is a circle or arc shape with numbered notches, according to your requirements.
#In the Face Editor, choose ''' Place Circular Gauge ''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it.
#Once the circular gauge is placed, click ''' Move Item ''' or press Escape so that your circular gauge is selected.
#You can customize the circular gauge to your requirements, including color, line thickness, number of ticks, angle, label and more.

=Adding hardware=
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles.

==Adding self-clinching fasteners==
Protocase uses PEM® brand self-clinching fasteners.
#In the Face Editor, choose Fasteners from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#:[[File:Adding Self Clinching Fasteners.PNG|300px]]
#:The Fasteners section of the Library Manager opens.
#:[[File:Library Manager self clinching fasteners.PNG|500px]]
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)
#Select the thread '''Length'''.
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed.
#Select a '''Part Number'''.
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature. 
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with "ZI".) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones.
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.
#:Place the fastener on the face.
#:[[File:Self Clinching Fastener Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Move''' button or press the '''Esc''' key.
#:[[File:Self clinching fasteners in 3D viewer.PNG|500px]] 
'''See Also''': 
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']] 

==Adding hardware such as handles==
#In the '''Library''' drop-down menu, click '''Hardware'''
#:[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px]]
#Browse the hardware items to find the item you need.
#:[[File:Library Manager Hardware.PNG|500px]]
#Select the hardware item you want to use, and click '''Place This Item'''
#Place item on the face where you want it.
#Click Save to view your design in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:Hardware Handles 3D viewer.PNG|500px]]

==Adding Rubber Feet==
#On the Library drop-down menu in the right corner, select Hardware and click '''GO'''.
#;[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px|]]
#Choose the folder labelled '''Rubber Feet'''. Select the rubber foot you require: Large Rubber Foot, Medium Rubber Foot, Small Rubber Foot or Tapered (which is attached via adhesive).
#;[[File:Library Manager Rubber Feet.PNG|600px|]]
#Click '''Place This Item''' to place the rubber foot in your desired location.
#In order to have a stable enclosure, you will then need to place the same rubber foot in the other three corners of your enclosure.
#;[[File:Rubber Feet Placed in Face Editor.PNG|600px|]]
#The Protocase Engineering team recommends placing each rubber foot at least 0.5 or 1 inch away from the edges of your enclosure. If your enclosure is very large, you may go even farther from the edge if required.
#;[[File:Medium Rubber feet in 3D viewer.PNG|600px|]]

==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==
====Adding a countersink to a face====
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole.
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Adding a countersink to a face.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of "100.0° #2" indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.
#;[[File:Countersink Metal Thickness.PNG|600px]]
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png|200px]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera. 

====Adding a tapped hole to a face====
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole.
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Tapped Hole.PNG|500px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of "2-56 [0.07]" indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07" for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.)
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face. 
#:[[File:Tapped Hole solid circle with partial circle around it.PNG]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.
 

====Adding screws to a face====
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''.
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener. 

====Replacing screws and PEMs====
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the fastener. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it.
#Right-click and select '''Replace PEMs''' from the menu that displays.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs right click.PNG|300px]]
#The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the fastener you wish to use, and then click the '''Place This Item'' to select this fastener instead of the existing one.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs choose new fastener.PNG|600px]]

==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure. 
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''
#Click '''New'''.
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens.
#:[[File:Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly click new.PNG|250 px]]
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary.
#:[[File:Choose the bracket you want to customize.PNG|600 px]]
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button.
#:The 3D View window opens.
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the left hand panel.
#You will be prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure).
#:The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:Sub-assembly dialog.PNG|500 px]]
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is "L Bracket by Base - Bottom". ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''
#:'''Part Number'''
#:'''Description'''
#Click '''OK.'''
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu. 
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face. 

'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure.
#Click the '''Place Item''' button.
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon.
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.
#Specify how you would like your sub-assembly attached: '''welding, self-clinching fasteners or other'''.
#Whether you choose welding or self-clinching fasteners, please provide as many specific details as you can. (Ex: specify the type of welding you would like, such as tack weld, plug weld, etc).
# For self-clinching fasteners, please provide as much detail as to what fastener you would like used. Ex: nuts, studs or standoffs. Include all of the key information, including part number, thread size and length. If you do not have a specific preference, please advise our Engineering & Design Services team that they may choose the most logical option.
#Choose "other" if you'd prefer to attach your sub-assembly yourself once you receive the completed order.
#'''Note''': Once you order your design, our Engineering & Design Services team may contact you if they require more information or need to clarify details.
#View video tutorial about sub-assemblies: https://youtu.be/XciURDevnXA
 

=Adding Graphics from the Graphics Library=

The Graphics Library allows you to place common symbols and graphics, such as USB, Electrical Ground and Caution.
#Once in the Face Editor, you can access the Library by selecting Graphics from the drop-down Library menu in the top corner.
#[[File:Graphics from Graphics Library.PNG|400px]]
#The Graphics library is organized by category: Electronic Symbols, Flags, Marks, Warning & Caution Symbols and Other. Click on the Category to expand the list and see all of the graphic symbols available.
#[[File:Library manager Graphics Library.PNG|600px]]
#Once you’ve found the graphic symbol you want to place on your design, click the symbol name and then click Place This Item. Resize and relocate the graphics symbol, just as you would with any other object.

Note: You can also change the color of your symbol, so long as the symbol you’ve placed is only one color in nature. (Any symbol that is more than one color, such as Electrostatic Sensitivity, Laser, Pacemaker and Two Person Lift, cannot be altered with different colors. Flag graphics' colors also cannot be changed).

=Adding Components from Library=
Protocase Designer's Library Manager includes a tab for Components, where you can quickly and easily download boards, connectors, drives, fans, heatsinks, LCD screens and power supplies, and then place on you rdesign.

==Add Components from Library==
#Once in the Face Editor, select Components from the Library drop-down menu in the top-right corner.
#You will see a small dialog box open that says Syncing Library. This This is an important step for being able to access all of the parts of the Library Manager.
#Click on tab labeled "Components." Scroll through the list of categories to find your desired component category type.
#Click on the component you wish to use. In order to access the component, you will need to download it to your local copy of Protocase Designer. Click Download.
#Once the component file has been downloaded, you will see three buttons: Place this item, Export to File and Create Personal Copy.
#Once you click Place this item, you will be prompted to choose your mounting fasteners, in the exact same way that you would see when you are importing your own STEP file of a component in your design.

==Save a Personal Copy of a Component in Your Library==
#If you want to save a copy of a component from the library with your desired fasteners, stay in the Face Editor.
#Click on the component you've placed with fasteners. Once it is selected, you will see a button on the right-hand menu called "Add to Library". Once you click this button, you will be prompted to edit the properties, including adding a personalized name for the component.
#Once you click OK, the grouped component will be saved in your personal library. You can access it and place it on your design by clicking the Personal tab in the Library Manager.

==Contribute to the Library Manager==
#You may save a cutout, graphic or component from your Personal Library and contribute it to the Public Library.
#Click the Add to Public Library button. Select the applicable category and sub-category, then click submit.
#The Protocase Designer team moderates the submissions - which can take 1-2 business days.
#Once your submission is cleared, the cutout, graphic or component you've added will show up in the public library.
#Remember – you should only add items to the public library if you want it to be accessible to others. Proprietary items for your organization should be kept to your own personal library.

=Importing Components=
You can import STEP or DXF components of circuit boards, fans and other accessories.

==Importing STEP Files==
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, in the right-hand corner, select '''Import 3D Component''' from the Import/Export Dropdown Menu.
#:[[File:1 Import Export Drop down Go.PNG|400px]]
#Protocase Designer will open a browser window so you can select the STEP file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#If your file is very large, Protocase Designer will display a loading warning. If the software takes longer than a minute or two to import your component, you may need to simplify the STEP file before importing it.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#:[[File:2 Component Choose Mating Face.PNG|600px]]
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
[[File:4 PEM Editor Dialog.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''Place Fasteners''' to open the Fasteners library. Choose the fastener you'd like to place.
#:[[File:5 Choose Fasteners and click Place This Item.PNG|600px]]
#Place the fastener in the appropriate mounting holes.
#:[[File:6 Place the Fastener where you want the component mounted.PNG|600px]]
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:7 once youve clicked Save to save your changes, you will see your component with fasteners in the Face Editor on your model.PNG|600px]]
 

==Importing DXF Files==
#Importing a DXF file of a component follows many of the same steps as importing a STEP file, with a few additional steps required.
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, under Imports, click Component. Protocase designer will open a browser window so you can select the DXF file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#Once Protocase Designer detects it is a DXF file being imported, an additional window will display that will allow you to customize how the DXF will be imported.
##Layers: DXF files contain many layers, and Protocase Designer cannot detect which layers actually need to be used. Use this tool to select which layers of your DXF you'd like to import.
##Thickness: Protocase Designer cannot automatically detect the thickness of your DXF file, so you can use this tool to set your thickness. Two important things to note – the thickness value is in inches – and your thickness choice will not be visible until the component is displayed in Protocase Designer’s 3D Editor.
##Units: Protocase Designer cannot currently detect units in DXF files (we are working on this!), so you will need to change the expected units. You can view the over bounds, which are displayed in inches. If you change the unit of measurement, the software will update the over bounds automatically. If your ideal unit of measurement is not listed as an option, you will need to convert the DXF’s units to inches before importing into Protocase Designer.
[[File:1 DXF Properties Selection.PNG|600px]]
#Once you have addressed Layers, Thickness and Units and made your desired changes, click the Accept button to save your changes and close the import tool. Protocase Designer will use the data you entered to generate a component from the DXF file you originally imported.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
(Tip: Make sure "Snap to Grid" is turned off, as it will allow you to place your fasteners precisely where you require them).
[[File:File:2 DXF Place Fasteners.PNG|600px]]
#Click the checkmark to save your changes.
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:3 DXF in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

==Changing Your Mounting Fasteners==
#Because you placed your mounting self-clinching fasteners in the Secondary Face Editor (as recommended), Protocase Designer makes your components and the fasteners a grouped object.
#Select your component (which is a grouped object with your fasteners). In the right-hand menu, click Edit.
#You will return to the Secondary Face Editor, where you can select and delete the fasteners you previously chose, and add in new ones as needed.

==Use Component Projection==
#Use the Component Projection feature to view an outline of your components when editing other faces in your Protocase Designer assembly.
#Once in the Face Editor, click on the View tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:View tab in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]
#In the Components section, click the '''Show Outline''' checkbox.
#:[[File:View Tab in Face Editor Component Projection Outline.PNG|300px]]
#To control the amount of detail shown in your component projection outline, use the slider. Far left means very little detail. The farther to the right you go, the level of detail increases.
#:[[File:Component Projection in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

=Manipulating objects=
==Selecting object(s)==
#On the '''Design''' tab in the Face Editor toolbar, select the '''Move''' tool. [[File:tool -edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]
#Do one of the following:
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.
#*To select multiple objects:
#**Click the first object, then down the <Shift> key and click the other objects; or
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects.
#:[[File:Selecting Objects.PNG|600px]]
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.
#:[[File:Light Blue box is drawn.PNG|300px]]

==Editing object(s)==
'''''To edit a single object''''' 
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''.
''or''
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type.
 
'''''To edit a group''''' 
*To edit a group, you must right-click to ungroup the items, then edit the object(s) individually. If you wish, you can right-click to make the objects a group once more.

==Moving object(s)==
To move a single object: 
#Select the object.
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location. 

To move several objects: 
#Select all the objects.
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location. 

To move cutouts from one face to another:
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items.
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with.
:For detailed instructions, see:
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]] 

==Locking item(s)==
To lock a single object:
#Select the object.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the item.
#:[[File:Locking items.PNG|600px]]
 
To Lock several objects:
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the items. 

==Grouping and ungrouping objects==
'''''To group objects'''''

#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the <Shift> key and select each object.
#Right click and select Group from the menu that displays.
#:[[File:1 Right click to Group Objects.PNG|400px]]
#Your objects are now grouped as one single object, which you can move around on the face of your model.
#:[[File:1 Grouped Object.PNG|400px]]
 
'''''To ungroup objects'''''
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.
#Click the group.
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel. 
'''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement. 
'''See Also'''
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]] 

==Aligning and distributing objects==
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.

#Select 2 or more objects.
#With the objects selected, right click and select either Align or Distribute the menu. 
#:[[File:Align Objects with objects selected.PNG|500px]]
'''Alignment''' 
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects 
 
'''''Notes:'''''
*Objects align to the first object selected.
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.

'''Distribute''' 
#:[[File:Distribute Horizontally.PNG|500px]]

[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops 
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects 

==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==
#You can find the cut, copy, paste, undo and redo functions in the '''Edit''' section of the Design tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:Cutting copying and pasting objects buttons.PNG|200px]]
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button.
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button.
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor.
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Move''' tool or press the <Esc> key when you are done. 

Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] buttons in the Edit section of the toolbar. 

==Adding and managing layers==
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.

'''Layer Toolbar'''

Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list.
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.)
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer.

'''''To add a new layer '''''
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel.
#:[[File:Adding and managing layers.PNG|300px]]
#:The Input dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer.

'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed.
#Paste the object(s).

'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list. 

==Using the Array Tool==
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool,
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects.

'''To create an array:'''
#Click the "Edit Face" button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.
#With the object highlighted, select the "Pattern" tool in the Design tab of the toolbar.
#:[[File:Array pattern icon.PNG|100px]]
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)
#:[[File:Select Array Type.PNG|200px]]

You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:

'''A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:'''
*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)
*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)
*Quantity (the number of objects in the array
#:[[File:Array Linear Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)
*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)
*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)
#:[[File:Array Circular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*X Spacing (horizontal spacing)
*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)
*X Quantity (number of columns)
*Y Quantity (number of rows)
#:[[File:Array Rectangular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the "ungroup" button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that
your objects are properly spaced.

#:[[File:Resize array.PNG|400px]]

=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=

===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===
#To print all faces of the enclosure, go to the '''View''' tab of the toolbar in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:View Print icon.PNG|400px]]
#Click the Print icon.
#:[[File:Print Icon.PNG|100px]]
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.
#:[[File:Print to Scale.PNG|400px]]
#Click '''Print.'''

===To calibrate the printer===
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button.
#A test page opens.
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle.
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens.
#If the printed rectangle is not 3" x 3", then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''. 
 

=Exporting and importing face templates=
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer. 
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.
#Select '''Graphics > Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics > Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image.
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.

File:Quick Search Place Item.PNG

2022-05-31T14:15:14Z

Amacdonald:

File:Quick Search finding fastener.PNG

2022-05-31T14:14:56Z

Amacdonald:

File:Quick Search initial screen.PNG

2022-05-31T14:14:35Z

Amacdonald:

Face Editor

2022-05-23T16:48:38Z

Amacdonald: /* Face Editor preferences */

=Face Editor overview=
The Face Editor is the 2D workspace for designing each face of your enclosure.

[[File:Face Editor 1 Face Editor Overview.PNG|1000px|Face Editor Window]] 

[[File:Face Editor 2 Design Toolbar.PNG]] 

;2D Design bar
:Contains Cutout, Graphic, Masking, Reference and Exclusion, with the common drawing types (circle, ellipse, rectangle, path, line, arc, etc).

;2D Tools Bar
:Contains common tools such as move, trim, pattern, measure, dimension, coordinates.

===Face Editor preferences===
If you want to use a different unit of measure or otherwise customize your Designer interface, you can set global parameters in the [[Preferences_dialog_box | '''Preferences''' dialog box]] in the 3D Viewer. 

=Viewing the face=

Click the View tab in the toolbar to see all of your viewing options.

[[File:View Toolbar.PNG]]

==Zooming==
When you zoom in/out in either the 3D View or the Face Editor, the face zooms in on or away from the pointer, so that you never lose your place.
*To zoom in/out in the 3D View, rotate the wheel button. '''Known Limitation''': Using the mouse wheel button is currently the only way to zoom in the 3D view.
*To zoom in/out in the Face Editor, do one of the following.
:*Click the '''Zoom In''' [[File:Face Editor Zoom In.PNG|text-bottom]] or '''Zoom Out''' button [[File:Face Editor Zoom Out.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar, then click the face for each incremental zoom.
:*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or '''View''' > '''Zoom Out''', then click the face for each incremental zoom. 
*To zoom in on a particular area:
*Choose '''View''' > '''Zoom In''' or click the '''Zoom In''' button in the toolbar, then drag a box around the area you want to zoom. 

==Resetting the view==
To return the face to its default location and zoom level, do one of the following:
*Click the '''Reset View''' button [[File:Face Editor Reset View.PNG|text-bottom]] in the toolbar.
*Choose '''View''' > '''Reset View'''. 

==Viewing the front or back of the face==
When you click a face to edit, the ''side'' of the face that you click in the 3D View is displayed in the Face Editor. To toggle to the opposite side of the face, click '''Back'' in the View Tab. 
[[File:Viewing the Front or the Back of the face front and back.PNG|200px]] 

=Coordinate System=
The origin in the Face Editor is located at the absolute origin in the coordinate system of the model. The x- and y-coordinates for each face are referenced from the absolute origin and always increase moving away from the origin. The figure below shows examples of the coordinate system for several faces on a U-Shape enclosure.

[[File:diagram-coordinates.png|550px|Face Editor Coordinate System]] 

===Choosing the Units of Measure===

You can set the default unit of measure.

#Choose '''Preferences''' from the '''Edit''' menu.
#Click the down-arrow for '''Display Units'''.
#Select the unit of measure (INCHES, CM, or MM).
#Click '''OK.''' 

=Drawing shapes=

==Selecting the drawing (object) type==
Select the type of object to be added to the face by using the Circle, Rectangle, and other buttons in the toolbar. The object types are '''Cutout''', '''Graphic''', '''Exclusion''', '''Masking''', and '''Construct'''. 
#On the 2D Mode toolbar, click the button under the "Mode" label; by default, the object type is set to '''Cutout'''. 
#:[[File:button_Cutout_NEW.png||80px|bottom]] 
 

===Using the Cutout object type===
The Cutout object is used to add shapes for accommodating connectors, switches, ports, cutout logos and images, etcetera. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face Editor#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]] 

===Using the Graphic object type===
The Graphic object type is used to add silkscreen or digital print to the face. Silkscreening is limited to specific colors; digital printing can print any number of colors, including gradients, with precise rendering. Note that you cannot apply both silkscreening and digital printing to the same face. '''Important!''' Before you select which method you will use, please see the constraints described in '''[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|About Graphics]]'''.

====Adding graphics (silkscreening or digital printing)====
#Add [[#Add text|text]] and/or [[#Add images|images]] to the face. (The Mode automatically changes to '''Graphic'''.) The items will be silkscreened or digitally printed, depending on your Preferences setting.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool or press <Enter>. The default parameters for the text are shown in the Properties panel, where you can change them (Color, Origin, Rotation, Point size, Typeface, and Style (Bold, Italic, etc.).
When using digital printing, please note the following limitations:
:*You cannot use digital printing on metal if the color is "None"; it does not stick to bare metal so the enclosure must have a color.
:*No part of the face being printed can be masked, because the reflection from the face will damage the print heads.
:*You cannot use digital printing on aluminum or stainless steel with a grained finish.
:*The printed area must be no more than 46"x46", and the face it is printed on can be no more than 24" high.
:*The face and all its attachments must be entirely flat. Nothing (including PEMs and flanges) can stick up above the surface.
:*The inside of the face cannot be printed. 

=====Setting global silkscreening or digital printing preferences=====
#Choose '''Edit''' > '''Preferences'''.
#In '''Graphics Type''' choose one of the following from the menu:
#*'''Silkscreen''' (Every face will use silkscreen.)
#*'''Digital Printing''' (Every face will use digital printing.)
#*'''Ask''' (The first time you either click the '''Text''' button or change the '''Mode''' to "Graphic" for a face, you are prompted to choose which method to use for that face.)
#Click '''OK'''. 

=====Changing between digital printing and silkscreening=====
#In the Face Editor, select the face that you want to change.
#Choose the '''Convert...''' command from the '''Graphics''' menu.
#*If the face is using silkscreen, the '''Convert to Direct Digital Printing''' command is listed in the menu. If the face is using digital print, the '''Convert to Silkscreen''' command is listed in the menu. When changing from digital print to silkscreen, colors are automatically adjusted to match stock Protocase silkscreen colors. Note that you can change the printing method for each face, but you cannot combine both methods on one face. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Adding_silkscreening_or_digital_printing_without_using_Protocase_Designer|Adding graphics to a face using a different graphics editor]]
*[[About_Graphics_(Silkscreening_and_Digital_Printing)|Tell Me About Graphics]] 

===Using the Exclusion object type===
The Exclusion object type is used to mark areas where other objects (except text and graphics) cannot be added. For example, if you add a cutout for a switch and want to ensure that nothing can be added to the design that would interfere with the switch body, you could add an exclusion zone over the cutout for the neck of the switch that covers the body of the switch. For specific applications of this technique, see the tutorials on '''[[Creating_double-d_cutouts|Creating Double-D Cutouts]]''' and '''[[Creating_key_slot_cutouts|Creating Key Slot Cutouts]]'''. Note that exclusion zones allow text and/or graphics.

===Using the Masking object type===
The Masking object type is used to prevent an area from being painted. This is usually done to make a bare spot for an electrical ground. You can use Masking on any metal, although when you use it on cold rolled steel, you will receive a warning that the metal will rust. 
# In the '''Mode''' menu, click the '''Masking''' button.
#:[[File:Button_Masking_NEW.png|80px]]
# Choose a shape (preferably a rectangle) and draw the area(s) you want masked. 
'''Notes''' 
*Due to manufacturing constraints, masking cannot be applied to any part of a face that has digital printing.
*If you mask the entire inside of a face that goes up against another face that has a bend, a tiny sliver of the bare metal will be visible on the outside of the case, around the bent edge. Generally this should not pose any problems, but if you want that sliver gone, make the masking rectangle smaller on that edge by about 0.1". 

===Using the Construct object type===
The Construct (Construction) object is used to add a design or other reference (including a note) to any part of the design. Construct objects never affect production. 

==Drawing circles==
#In the Mode toolbar, click the '''Circle''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the circle, then drag to set the radius of the circle, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing ellipses==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Ellipse''' tool.
#Click to place the centre of the ellipse, then drag to set the radius of the ellipse, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing rectangles and squares==
If you are drawing a square, first turn on the '''[[Face_Editor#Turn_on.off_the_Grid | grid]]''' to restrict the bounding box to a square, or after you draw the rectangle, change the '''Width''' and '''Height''' fields in the Properties panel to be equal.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Rectangle''' tool.
#Click to place one corner of the rectangle, then drag to set the opposite corner, and release the mouse button when it is the size you want.
#When done, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing custom paths==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool [[File:tool-path_NEW.png|80px]].
#Click on the face to place each point of the path.
#Click the first point again to finish the path and fill the shape. 

====Creating an arc using the Path tool====
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Path''' tool.
#Click on the face to place the starting point of the arc (and, if you want to start the path with straight lines, additional points for each line segment).
#Click the '''arc''' button in the Properties panel, or press <a>.
#Click on the face to place the ''end'' of the arc.
#:The arc is drawn, but is not yet locked. '''Note''': The arc might not be displayed until you move the pointer.
#Drag the arc to change its size, then click to lock the arc size.
#:The end point is the start of the next arc or line in the path. You can continue to place arcs, or change to lines (by clicking '''line''' on the '''Properties''' panel or by pressing <A>).
#If you are creating a cutout, close the path, either by ending a line or arc on the first point in the path, or by clicking '''Close Path''' in the Properties panel. Until the path is closed, it will not be displayed in the 3D View. (If you are creating a graphical object, it does not need to be closed, and will be displayed correctly in the 3D View.) 

====Path editing: Using the Trim and Merge tools to create cutouts====
The Trim and Merge tools provide quick ways to create paths for cutouts. The Merge tool lets you create an outline (path) by merging multiple shapes. The Trim tool lets you delete lines in intersecting shapes to create the path you want.

'''''To merge two or more objects'''''
#Place two or more objects on a face, each overlapping at least part of one other object.
#:[[File:Merge two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select all the objects you want to merge. (If you select an object by accident, you can remove it by holding down the Shift key and clicking the object you accidentally selected.)
#:[[File:Merge Select Objects.PNG]]
#Right-click within the selection and choose '''Merge''' from the popup menu.
#:[[File:Merge Right Click and choose Merge.PNG]]
#:The objects are merged into a single cutout.
#:[[File:Merged into single cutout.PNG]] 
'''''To edit a merged object''''' 
If you select a merged object, each node in what is now a single object can be dragged to further change the object shape. In this example, the selected node (colored red) is being dragged up and to the right.
:[[File:Edit a Merged Object.PNG]] [[File:Merge move node of object.PNG]] 
'''Note''' If you '''[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor|save the merged items as a cutout]]''', you might want to then '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|change the saved cutout's origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement, because Designer does not have control over where the origin ends up after merging objects. 
'''''To trim two or more objects''''' 
In this example, a key slot is created with the Trim tool.
#Place a circle on the face.
#Add a rectangle to the bottom of the face, overlapping it.
#:[[File:Trim two or more objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Edit''' button and select both objects.
#:[[File:Trim Select both objects.PNG]]
#Click the '''Trim''' button.
#:[[File:Trim button.PNG]]
#:The outline of each object is outlined.
#:[[File:example-Trim3_NEW.png]]
#Use your cursor to eliminate the lines you do not want.
#:[[File:example-Trim4_NEW.png]]
#When you are done, press the '''Esc''' key on your keyboard, or click any other button on the Mode toolbar, to exit the Trim mode. '''Important!''' If you click the '''Accept and Close''' button now, the trims will not be saved. 
#:The remaining path is now a cutout and is displayed as such.
#:[[File:example-Trim5.jpg]]
:'''Tip:''' A notch could have been created by removing different lines in the same overlap:
::[[File:example-TrimNotch1_NEW.png]] 
'''See Also: '''
*[[Face Editor#Cutouts|Drawing cutouts]]

====Solving problems with merging objects====
If objects being merged are very close to matching in size but are not perfectly matching, Designer can encounter redrawing issues that result in the cutouts disappearing and reappearing in the design. To fix such problems while retaining inexact matches, trim all the segments that are causing the problems, as described in this topic. (To ensure that objects match exactly, use the grid or specify positions as described in [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]].) Note that although both topics use vent slots as an example, the same general procedures apply to any merged cutout.
 
In this example, a vent slot was made by joining two circles and a rectangle. After the rectangle was drawn, the circles were added visually to each end of the rectangle, nearly perfectly the same size as the rectangle but extending just slightly beyond its top and bottom: 
[[file:solving_merge_problems_1_NEW.png]] 
If you then merge them and click <Esc>, because the circle diameters are not exactly the same as the rectangle height, the image completely disappears from the 3D View, but the objects are still in the Face Editor view.
 
If you experience this problem but would like the slot to remain as designed, follow these steps to fix it. If you would like the slot to be the same size all the way across, delete the problem slot and draw a new one using either method given in the [[Creating_custom_vents | Creating custom vents]] topic.
#Click the '''Edit''' tool and select the two circles and the rectangle.
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_2_NEW.png]]
#Use the '''Trim''' tool to remove all the intersections of the circles with the rectangles that you do not want. Zoom in enough to see the tiny segments remaining, and remove them as well.
#:These two images show one of these tiny segments before and after being trimmed:
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_3_NEW.png|300px]]
#:[[file:solving_trim_merge_problems_4_NEW.png|300px]]
#When completed, click the <Esc> key or the '''Accept and Close''' button, and the objects are merged correctly. 

==Drawing lines==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Line''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line.
#Drag to set the end of the line.
#When you are finished drawing lines, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Drawing arcs==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Arc''' tool.
#Click and hold down the mouse button to start the line that will describe the arc.
#Drag the line, and release the mouse button at the end of the arc.
#Move the mouse to a point on the arc and drag to resize it; when it is the size you wish, click the mouse to complete the arc.
#When you are finished drawing arcs, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>. 

==Adding text==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Text''' button.
#Click on the face and begin typing.
#*'''Note''': After placing one piece of text, even if you press the '''<Enter>''' key, you are still in text mode; if you click elsewere on the face anywhere and type, you will enter more text at that new location. This allows you to enter multiple text blocks at a time.
#When you are finished adding text blocks, click the '''Edit''' tool [[File:tool-edit_NEW.png|80px|bottom]] or press <Esc>.
#Using the Properties panel, you can now change the '''Rotation''', '''Font''', '''Font Size''', and '''Font Style'''. You can also edit the '''Text'''. For details, see '''[[Face Editor#Managing object properties|Managing object properties]]'''. 

====Adding special characters====
If working with the Windows version of Designer, special characters can be added using the key combination of ALT + the decimal ASCII code, as outlined in the [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters#Latin_script linked Unicode table]. The values from the Latin and Latin 1 sections have been tested to work properly.

There is similar functionality in Linux and Mac environments, but the implementation of them is system specific. As an alternative, you can follow the procedure below.

If the symbol you are looking for cannot be found in that table, you can try adding any special character you require as follows.
#Copy the character.
#In Designer, paste the character into the text field in the Properties panel:
#;[[File:Adding special characters.PNG|border|500px]]
#:'''Tip''' The method above places the symbol on the same baseline and in the same size as the text. Since the trademark symbol and the registered trademark symbol are typically in superscript, you can create this effect by adding the symbol to a text field of its own, making it a smaller font size, and placing it slightly higher than the text:
#;[[File:Registered trademark symbol text field of its own.PNG|500px]] 

'''See Also''' 
*'''[[Centering_text_on_a_face|Centering text on a face]]''' 

==Adding images==
You can add images (graphics files) to a face, in bitmap format (.BMP, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, or .PDF), as well as Scalable vector graphics (.SVG). Other vector files (.AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF) can also be included for production purposes, though those formats are not displayed. 
'''Note''': A .PDF can be in either bitmap or vector format. For details and help in determining which yours is, see [http://visual-integrity.com/faqs/spotting-difference-vector-raster-pdf/ '''Spotting the Difference''']. 
If you have one or more complex images that wrap around cutouts and/or occupy a large portion of a face, you may want to use the Export/Import Face Template feature instead. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Exporting_and_importing_face_templates|'''Exporting and Importing Face Templates''']].
#Click the '''Image''' button [[File:Tool-image_NEW.png|80px]] on the Mode toolbar.
#Click on the face where you want to place the image. The Choose Bitmap dialog is displayed.
#Navigate to and select the bitmap file, then click '''Open'''. ('''Note''': The file name might not be listed in the Open dialog, even though it is in the folder. In this case, enter the file name manually.)
#Designer does not yet display vector graphics; this functionality will be added to a future release. However, vector graphics produce much better results when the image has hard lines and curves, such as in a logo or any text, so after you add the bitmap graphic for display, Designer gives you the following options:
#*'''Add a vector image''': Click this button to navigate to and select the vector file version of the bitmap image that you loaded, in one of the supported vector file formats (.SVG, .AI, .EPS, .DXF, .DWG, or .PDF).
#*'''Have us fix the image''': Click this button if you do not have a vector file version and would like Protocase to create it for you. You will be informed of the added fee. Note that graphics with subtle gradients or fine detail might be impossible to recreate; if this is the case, you will be informed after the file is received.
#*'''Leave it alone''': Click this button to if you do not have a vector file version but do not want Protocase to create one for you, knowing that pixelation might occur in any hard lines or curves.
#After selecting one of these options, the image is added to the face.
'''Notes''': 
* It is recommended to set silkscreen quality (Edit->Preferences->Display Settings) to at least 70% to display images clearly.
*Do not attempt to save a flat image as one of the supported vector types for importing into Designer.
*Extra charges will be incurred if the graphic is on any powder coating other than white, since an underbase must be applied for the graphic to be visible and the proper color, and a silhouette of the image must be created for that underbase. You will be informed of the extra charges before production begins.
* If using Inkscape to work with your SVG file, be aware that FlowText (and FlowRoot), used by Inkscape in certain circumstances, is not part of the SVG standard and may cause issues when importing. This can be corrected by selecting the text then going to menu Text->Unflow or hitting (Shift-Alt-W). Then delete the "ghost" image that appears outside the draw box and save the file as "Plain SVG". This should allow the SVG image to import.
 
====Exporting images====
You can export an image from a face. The graphic is exported to a .PNG file.
#In the Face Editor, click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, then click the image you want to export.
#Click the '''Save Image To File''' button in the Properties panel. The Save dialog opens.
#Choose the folder, enter the file name, and click '''Save'''. 

==Importing fonts==
You can import your own fonts to be used on a face.
#Click the '''Graphics''' menu in the face editor.
#Select '''Import font'''.
#Select the font you would like to import, and click '''open'''.
'''Notes''':
*Some fonts do not silkscreen well, and if used with silkscreening we will review your design manually before approving it.
*Typically, 13pt fonts and above will not generate problems. If you are using a font with no slim lines or features, sometimes you may go as low as 9pts.
*If the paint used on your enclosure is Sandtex or other rough paint, an additional 2pts size is recommended.'''

=Using the Measure tool=
The Measure tool lets you measure between two points on a face, and move and/or align one object precisely in relation to another one. 
'''See Also:'''
*[[Face_Editor#Displaying_measurements|Dimensions: Displaying measurements for review]]
*[[Aligning_cutouts_on_opposite_faces|Aligning cutouts on opposite faces]] 

==Using the Measure tool to determine the distance between two points on objects or anywhere on a face==
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the object or location that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the object or location that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''total distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool initial selection of objects.PNG|600px]] 
#You can continue measuring distances in the same way. When done, click the '''Move''' tool or press <Esc>. 

==Using the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object==
You can use the Measure tool to move an object a specific distance from another object. This example shows how to move the centre of a circle cutout 5 inches to the right and 3 inches below the bottom right corner of a rectangle cutout.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#Click the bottom right corner of the rectangle cutout.
#Click the centre of the circle cutout.
#:The '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' are displayed in the Properties panel.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500px]]
#Enter "5" in '''x difference''' and "-3" in '''y difference'''.
#:The circle cutout moves based on the new values. (The first point you click is the reference point; the second point you click moves relative to the reference point. Positive or negative x values move up or down, respectively, and positive or negative y values move right or left, respectively.)
 

==Using the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects==
You can use the Measure tool to specify both distance and alignment between objects. Once you determine the absolute coordinate for one object, the Measure tool lets you place all other objects on the face relative to that object.
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Measure''' button. [[File:Measure button.PNG|50px|bottom]]
#On the face, click the start point (the point that is to be the reference point), then click the end point (the point of an object that is to be placed in reference to the starting point).
#:An arrow is displayed from the start to end points, and the Properties panel displays the '''x difference''', '''y difference''', and '''distance''' between the two points.
#:[[File:Measure Tool with Fields.PNG|500 px]]
#Edit the '''x difference''' and/or '''y difference''' to position the second point in relation to the first. For example, to position an object one inch away from an existing object along both the X and Y axes, enter a '''y difference''' of "1" and an '''x difference''' of "1".
#:'''Note:''' If you do not need to measure or specify a distance between two objects, you can align them using the [[Face_Editor#Align_and_distribute_objects| '''Alignment tools''']] in the Properties panel. 

==Displaying measurements==
The '''Dimension''' tool lets you display the distance between any two points on a face. You can then take a screenshot with the measurements displayed, for peer reviews or other purposes. 
'''''To measure and display the distance between two points''''' 
#On the Mode toolbar, click the '''Dimension''' button. [[File:Dimension Button.PNG|75px|bottom]]
#:The distance of "0.000" is displayed at the cursor position, which is the current endpoint.
#Click the first endpoint of the distance you wish to measure, then move the cursor.
#:As you begin to move the cursor, the distance between the endpoint and the cursor position is displayed.
#:[[File:Measure and display the distance between two points actual.PNG|500px]]
#:If you make an error, click the '''Undo''' button in the Face Editor toolbar.
#:When the cursor is near an object, it snaps to the important points of the object (its center, or one of the compass points on its outline), a green circle is drawn around the snap-to point, and the lines turn green.
#:[[File:Green circle drawn around the snap-to point.PNG||500px]]
#:The lines turn red when the measurement does not have any meaning. There are only three types of measurements that have meaning:
#::The distance between the two points;
#::The distance in the x axis (when the lines are vertical and the arrows are horizontal); and
#::The distance in the y axis (when the lines are horizontal and the arrows are vertical).
#Click the second endpoint of the distance you wish to measure.
#:A second line parallel to the first line is drawn, and the distance between the lines is displayed. The displayed distance changes as you move the cursor. This example shows the distance between the parallel centers of the square and the circle.
#When the lines and distance are the way you want them, click the mouse.
#:The displayed lines and measurements are saved to the face, and the measurement is reset to 0.000 at the cursor position. You can add more measurements to the screen in this way.
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - 0 position.PNG|500px]]
#:'''Tip:''' You can display the measurement with the lines at an angle to their endpoints. For example, here the distance is shown between the bottom of the rectangle and the bottom of the circle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - near object.PNG|500px]]
#:and here the user drags the cursor to a position at an angle:
#:[[File:Displaying measurements 2 - snap point.PNG|500px]] 

'''''To delete a displayed measurement''''' 
Do either of the following:
*Right-click one of the lines in the measurement and choose '''Delete''' from the floating menu.
*Highlight the line and press the <Delete> key. 

=Using the grid=
Use the grid to quickly place and align objects. 

Note that for precise positioning of an object, especially when placing objects relative to other objects, you can also use the [[Face_Editor#Measuring_distances | '''Measure''' tool]] or the [[Face_Editor#Aligning_and_distributing_objects | '''alignment and distribution''']] buttons in the Properties panel.

===Turn on/off the Grid===
#In the View tab, go the Grid section
#[[File:Snap to Grid.PNG|200px]]
#*Click the Show checkbox to show the Grid.
[[File:Turn on-off the grid Show grid.PNG|600px]]

===Turning on/off Snap to Grid===
#To have your objects snap to the Grid:
#*Click the Snap checkbox 

===Changing grid size and offset===
#On the View tab of the toolbar, click the Size icon [[File:Changing Grid Size icon.PNG|bottom]] in the Grid section.
#In the Grid Size dialog that opens, change any of the following values:
:[[File:Changing Grid Size.PNG|300px]]
 
*'''Width''': Horizontal distance between grid lines.
*'''Height''': Vertical distance between grid lines.
*'''Offset Width''': Horizontal offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Offset Height''': Vertical offset of grid lines from default grid position.
*'''Grid Opacity''': Opacity of the grid lines. Move the slider to left for lighter lines or the right for darker lines.
*'''Save as Default Grid Size''': Use the current grid size when editing all faces in the Face Editor Window.
{{Note|If you change the Grid Size and do not check '''Save as Default Grid Size''', the grid will revert back to the default size after closing the Face Editor, even if you re-open the same face.}}
[[File:Grid with 1 in width and height, 1 in offset width and offset height.PNG|500px]]
 

=Managing object properties=

[[File:Top of Properties Panel.PNG|thumb|Properties panel view]]

[[File:Object Type needs to be called Path Type.PNG|thumb]]

===Top of Properties Panel===
[[File:Top of Properties Panel A.PNG]]
* The Properties Panel has the following tabs: Properties, Notes, Layers, Mode Help

*'''Tip''': You can right-click any object and choose Properties to open the Properties dialog, where you can change various properties depending on the object.

===Fill===
* Select the check box to fill in the object. The line thickness option is not available when the check box is selected.

===Line Thickness===
* Select a value from the list below the '''Filled''' check box.

===Color===
* Select a color by clicking the current color shown in the Properties panel, which opens the color menu.

===Type===
* Change the object type by selecting a different type from the list.
* Object types include:
:Cutout
:Graphic (Silkscreen or Digital Print)
:Exclusion
:Construct

===Origin===
* Change the location of the X and Y origins of an object with respect to the absolute coordinate system.
* Enter a number and press the Tab key to accept.
* The origin of an object is indicated by a red square.
* The origin for each object is determined as follows:
:'''Circles''' -- centre
:'''Ellipses''' -- centre
:'''Rectangles''' -- corner closes to the absolute origin
:'''Text''' -- bottom left corner
:'''Paths''' -- start point
:'''Lines''' -- start point
:'''Images''' -- bottom left corner 
'''See Also''' 
*[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout|Changing the origin of an existing cutout]]

===Circles===
* '''Radius, Diameter''' -- Changing one of these properties will automatically update the other. Diameter is twice the radius.
===Ellipses===
* '''RadiusX''' -- Radius along X-axis (defines horizontal length).
* '''RadiusY''' -- Radius along Y-axis (defines vertical length).
===Rectangles===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and Height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Lines===
* '''Length''' -- Distance from origin to end point.
===Images===
* '''Width, Height''' -- Width and height of the object.
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
===Text===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise
* '''Font''' -- Change the font to Arial, Courier, Garamond, Avant Garde, Times New Roman, Palatino, Bookman, Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Garamond, Verdana, Viking Stencil, Times New Roman, USAAF Stencil, Marketing Script-Shadow, Marketing Script, or Octin Stencil. Unicode characters (language scripts, punctuation marks, diacritics, mathematical and technical symbols, etc.) are also supported; see [[Face Editor#Adding_special_characters|'''Adding special characters''']].
* '''Font Size''' -- Change the font size within the available range of 9-99 points. '''Note''': Available font sizes are based on quality for the given materials. For example, Times Roman requires a minimum font size of 11 points. Also, colored letters on signal white powdercoat base are legible to 6 pt font for both Serif and Sans Serif fonts. For colored letters on non-white powdercoat, minimum font size is 10 pt for Serif fonts and 8 pt for Sans Serif fonts.
* '''Font Style''' -- Change the font style to Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, or Italic.
* '''Text''' -- Change the text to appear on the face. Press the Tab key to accept.

===Path===
* '''Rotation''' -- Angle with respect to origin in degrees. Positive value rotates object clockwise and negative value rotates object counter-clockwise 

==Adding notes==
You can add Notes to objects to communicate your design intentions to our Engineering & Design Services team. For example:
* "Notch in this bend."
* "Put a hinged door over this cutout."
To add a note about a non-stocked item such as permanent marking or piano hinges, you can draw the area for it in the proper location, using the '''Construct''' mode, and attach a note asking our Engineering & Design Services team to add it for you. Any object can have multiple notes. You can also add general notes (not attached to any specific object) to a face or part. '''Note''': If your notes result in significant design changes (such as a request for a non-stocked item), the quote that Designer generates might not be accurate. After you submit the file, Protocase Engineering & Design Services will give you the correct quote. 
'''''To add a note to an object'''''
#In the Face Editor, select the object that needs a note.
#Go to the Notes tab in the Properties Panel to create a new note. Click the Green + Button to create a new note.
#;[[File:Notes Tab.PNG|500px]]
#;Enter your note, then click OK.
#;[[File:Add New Note.PNG|500px]]
#:If the object already has a note, it will be displayed in the text window; to add another note to the object, click the '''New''' button, which clears the text window so you can enter another note.
#:Every note you enter is saved with the object. If the object has multiple notes, use the forward and back arrows to view them. You can edit each note at any time. 
'''''To add a general note'''''
#In the Face Editor or 3D View toolbar, click the '''Part Tree''' button.
#;[[File:To add a general note.PNG|500px]]
#In the tree list view, click the part of the enclosure that makes most sense to add the note.
The note is saved when you close the window or move to another part of it. 
'''''To delete a note'''''
* Display the note, then click the '''Delete''' button. 
'''''To review all notes for a design'''''
#In the 3D Editor, select '''View > View Notes'''. The Notes Viewer window opens, where you can see all notes for all faces at a glance.
#:[[File:Review All notes.PNG|500 px]]
#To go to the object and its notes in the Face Editor, highlight any note for the object, then click the '''Go to Face''' button. The Face Editor will open, with the object selected. 

=Adding cutouts=
You can add built-in and custom cutouts to your enclosure. 
'''See Also:''' 
*[[Cutout_Library|Cutout Library Overview]]
*[[Creating_custom_vents|Creating custom vents]] 

===Adding a cutout by browsing the Cutout Library===
Use this method to get a summary description and image of each item in the library.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Cutouts''' from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#;[[File:Cutout Library.PNG|150px]]
#Browse through the listings, clicking any one you are interested in to display it and its description.
#;[[File:Adding a cutout by browsing the cutout library.PNG|500px]]
#Click the '''Place Item''' button to load the displayed cutout. You are returned to the Face Editor, and the cursor changes to an image of the cutout.
#;[[File:Click the Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.
#;[[File:Click on the face in each location where you want to place the cutout.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done, press <Esc> or click any Mode tool to exit the placement process. 

==Adding "D" port cutouts==
You can add a "D"-shaped cutout (a circle with one side flattened) to your enclosure design.
#In the Face Editor, choose '''Place DPort''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it. The D-cutout is added in a default size, which you can change using the fields in the Properties panel.
#To place multiple cutouts, copy and paste it.
'''See Also:''' [[Creating double-d cutouts|Creating Double-D cutouts]] 

==Adding a circular gauge==
You can add a circular gauge graphic, which is a circle or arc shape with numbered notches, according to your requirements.
#In the Face Editor, choose ''' Place Circular Gauge ''' from the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu and click the face to place it.
#Once the circular gauge is placed, click ''' Move Item ''' or press Escape so that your circular gauge is selected.
#You can customize the circular gauge to your requirements, including color, line thickness, number of ticks, angle, label and more.

=Adding hardware=
You can easily add hardware on your enclosure to accommodate various components, such as self-clinching fasteners and handles.

==Adding self-clinching fasteners==
Protocase uses PEM® brand self-clinching fasteners.
#In the Face Editor, choose Fasteners from the Library drop-down menu in the right-hand corner.
#:[[File:Adding Self Clinching Fasteners.PNG|300px]]
#:The Fasteners section of the Library Manager opens.
#:[[File:Library Manager self clinching fasteners.PNG|500px]]
#Select the type ('''Nuts''', '''Standoffs''', or '''Studs''') and then select the '''Thread Type'''.
#:If you are adding standoffs or studs, the available thread '''Lengths''' are displayed. (Nuts do not have thread lengths, so if you are adding a nut, skip the next step.)
#Select the thread '''Length'''.
#:The available '''Part Numbers''' are displayed.
#Select a '''Part Number'''.
#:'''Note:''' Parts displayed with strikeout through the name are incompatible with the enclosure's current material type and/or thickness, and cannot be selected. If you continue with the incompatible design, you will receive a design check error when you estimate, order, or use the design check feature. 
#:Because fasteners have a minimum metal thickness, larger fasteners are not listed if the current enclosure material is too thin for them, or if the material is stainless steel and the fastener is zinc-coated. (Zinc-coated fastener names end with "ZI".) Some materials, especially stainless steel, require special fasteners. These cost a little more than standard ones.
#Click the '''Place PEM''' button, and then click on the face wherever you want to add the fastener(s). Note that if you try to place fasteners that are incompatible with the enclosure material, you receive a warning, as you did when you selected the incompatible Part Number.
#:Place the fastener on the face.
#:[[File:Self Clinching Fastener Place Item.PNG|500px]]
#When you are done adding fasteners, click the '''Move''' button or press the '''Esc''' key.
#:[[File:Self clinching fasteners in 3D viewer.PNG|500px]] 
'''See Also''': 
*[[Selecting_height_of_self-clinching_fasteners_based_on_material_thickness | '''Selecting height of self-clinching fasteners based on material thickness''']] 

==Adding hardware such as handles==
#In the '''Library''' drop-down menu, click '''Hardware'''
#:[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px]]
#Browse the hardware items to find the item you need.
#:[[File:Library Manager Hardware.PNG|500px]]
#Select the hardware item you want to use, and click '''Place This Item'''
#Place item on the face where you want it.
#Click Save to view your design in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:Hardware Handles 3D viewer.PNG|500px]]

==Adding Rubber Feet==
#On the Library drop-down menu in the right corner, select Hardware and click '''GO'''.
#;[[File:Library Hardware.PNG|300px|]]
#Choose the folder labelled '''Rubber Feet'''. Select the rubber foot you require: Large Rubber Foot, Medium Rubber Foot, Small Rubber Foot or Tapered (which is attached via adhesive).
#;[[File:Library Manager Rubber Feet.PNG|600px|]]
#Click '''Place This Item''' to place the rubber foot in your desired location.
#In order to have a stable enclosure, you will then need to place the same rubber foot in the other three corners of your enclosure.
#;[[File:Rubber Feet Placed in Face Editor.PNG|600px|]]
#The Protocase Engineering team recommends placing each rubber foot at least 0.5 or 1 inch away from the edges of your enclosure. If your enclosure is very large, you may go even farther from the edge if required.
#;[[File:Medium Rubber feet in 3D viewer.PNG|600px|]]

==Adding countersinks, tapped holes, and screws==
====Adding a countersink to a face====
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the countersink hole.
#Select the new '''Countersink''' check box in the Properties panel.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Adding a countersink to a face.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the angle of the countersink on the head, and the standard thread size. For example, a thread size of "100.0° #2" indicates a countersink angle of 100 degrees, with the standard #2 thread size.)
#If you chose a countersink size that is not the same size as the hole, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the hole size changed to match the selected countersink size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw.
#;[[File:Countersink Metal Thickness.PNG|600px]]
#:The countersink is drawn on the face.
#:[[File:countersink_NEW.png|200px]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the countersink is indicated with a solid circle with a circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera. 

====Adding a tapped hole to a face====
'''Important!''' Tapping holes in thin sheet metal is not recommended, since it is too thin for threads. Please consider using a self-clinching nut instead.
#In the Face Editor, choose the face you want, and draw a circle for the tapped hole.
#Select the new '''Tapped''' check box.
#:The '''Select Thread''' dialog opens, where a default Thread Size is displayed.
#:[[File:Tapped Hole.PNG|500px]]
#Click '''OK''' to select the default, or click the down-arrow to select a different size and then click '''OK'''.
#:'''Note: Thread Size''' includes the hole diameter along with the standard screw types. For example, a thread size of "2-56 [0.07]" indicates the standard 2-56 screw type with a diameter of 0.07" for the threaded hole. The minor diameter is used along with some tolerance so that it does not bind.
#If you chose a thread size that is not the same size as the circle, a warning message is displayed and you are given the option to correct it. Click '''Yes''' to have the circle changed to match the selected thread size. Click '''No''' if you want a different tolerance than is specified for the screw. ('''Important!''' In versions 4.4.9-Jul07 and higher, you are no longer given the option to change the hole size. It must be the same size as the circle.)
#:The tapped hole is drawn on the face. 
#:[[File:Tapped Hole solid circle with partial circle around it.PNG]] 
#:Note that in the Face Editor, the tapped hole is indicated with a solid circle with a ''partial'' circle around it. The outside circle indicates the outside diameter of the head of the screw, so you should keep it clear from any intercepting cutouts, other fasteners, etcetera.
 

====Adding screws to a face====
*Screws are included in each template (along with its hole cutout), and do not have to be added manually. However, when you load a new template, you can '''[[3D_View_Window#Changing_assembly_properties|select the screw type and color]]'''.
*A Flathead screw will be countersunk by default. Even if you choose an enclosure with a different default screw and change it to Flathead, it will use a countersunk screw.
*You cannot replace a screw with another screw; you can only replace it with a self-clinching fastener. 

====Replacing screws and PEMs====
You can review information on screws, and replace a screw with a PEM (or replace a PEM with another PEM), as follows. (Note that you cannot replace a screw with another screw.)
#In the Face Editor, click '''Edit''', then select the fastener. '''Note''': If the screw is grouped, you must first ungroup it.
#Right-click and select '''Replace PEMs''' from the menu that displays.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs right click.PNG|300px]]
#The Self Clinching Fastener Selection dialog opens, where you select the fastener you wish to use, and then click the '''Place This Item'' to select this fastener instead of the existing one.
#;[[File:Replacing Screws and PEMs choose new fastener.PNG|600px]]

==Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly==
You can create customized subassemblies and save them to the Cutout and Fasteners Library. You can then add them to enclosures at any point. In the following procedure, you create a bracket and save it as a subassembly, then add it to an enclosure. 
'''''To create and save a subassembly'''''
#Click '''New'''.
#:The New Assembly from Template dialog opens.
#:[[File:Creating and adding a bracket or other subassembly click new.PNG|250 px]]
#Choose the bracket that you want to customize, and then edit its parameters ('''Width''', '''Depth''', '''Height''', etc.) as necessary.
#:[[File:Choose the bracket you want to customize.PNG|600 px]]
#Add elements (cutouts for mounting, standoffs, etc.) as necessary to each face. When done, click the '''Accept Changes''' button.
#:The 3D View window opens.
#Choose '''Create Subassembly''' from the left hand panel.
#You will be prompted to select the face that is the mating face (that mounts onto the enclosure).
#:The New Library Item dialog opens.
#:[[File:Sub-assembly dialog.PNG|500 px]]
#You can enter or edit the following information for the bracket:
#:'''Name''': Note that a default name is provided that identifies the type of assembly, the mating face, and whether the mating face is on the top or bottom of the subassembly. For example, if you save an L bracket as a subassembly and select the outside of its base as the mating face, the default name in the New Library Item dialog is "L Bracket by Base - Bottom". ''We recommend that you change this default, to ensure that the subassembly name remains unique.''
#:'''Part Number'''
#:'''Description'''
#Click '''OK.'''
#:You receive a message that the bracket has been added to your library. It is now listed in the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu. 
#:'''Note on subassembly origin and placement''': The default origin for placement is the default origin of the subassembly template. In the 3D View, the origin is displayed with a red dot and arrows. In the Face Editor, the origin is displayed with blue arrows, and the '''x''' and '''y''' values in the Properties panel refer to this origin point. When placing a subassembly on an enclosure, the origin will be placed precisely where you click the enclosure face. 

'''''To place a subassembly on an enclosure'''''
#Load the enclosure and select the face to which you will add the bracket.
#:'''Note''': If you have just saved a subassembly to the library, it remains displayed, and when you click '''New''' to load an enclosure, you are prompted to save the current project. If you plan on making further changes to the subassembly later, do save it as a project, since currently you cannot use the editing tool in the Cutout Library to edit it. (This will be fixed in a future release.)
#In the Face Editor, make sure the correct '''Inside''' or '''Outside''' of the face is selected for the subassembly placement.
#From the '''Cutout Library and Fasteners''' menu, choose '''Cutout Library'''. The Library Manager window opens; select the subassembly that you want to add to the enclosure.
#Click the '''Place Item''' button.
#:The footprint (outline) of the mating face of the bracket is displayed as the cursor icon.
#Move the cursor (the footprint moves with it) to the desired location and click to drop it there; as noted above, the origin point of the assembly will be placed where you click. You can add multiple subassemblies in this way.
#Specify how you would like your sub-assembly attached: '''welding, self-clinching fasteners or other'''.
#Whether you choose welding or self-clinching fasteners, please provide as many specific details as you can. (Ex: specify the type of welding you would like, such as tack weld, plug weld, etc).
# For self-clinching fasteners, please provide as much detail as to what fastener you would like used. Ex: nuts, studs or standoffs. Include all of the key information, including part number, thread size and length. If you do not have a specific preference, please advise our Engineering & Design Services team that they may choose the most logical option.
#Choose "other" if you'd prefer to attach your sub-assembly yourself once you receive the completed order.
#'''Note''': Once you order your design, our Engineering & Design Services team may contact you if they require more information or need to clarify details.
#View video tutorial about sub-assemblies: https://youtu.be/XciURDevnXA
 

=Adding Graphics from the Graphics Library=

The Graphics Library allows you to place common symbols and graphics, such as USB, Electrical Ground and Caution.
#Once in the Face Editor, you can access the Library by selecting Graphics from the drop-down Library menu in the top corner.
#[[File:Graphics from Graphics Library.PNG|400px]]
#The Graphics library is organized by category: Electronic Symbols, Flags, Marks, Warning & Caution Symbols and Other. Click on the Category to expand the list and see all of the graphic symbols available.
#[[File:Library manager Graphics Library.PNG|600px]]
#Once you’ve found the graphic symbol you want to place on your design, click the symbol name and then click Place This Item. Resize and relocate the graphics symbol, just as you would with any other object.

Note: You can also change the color of your symbol, so long as the symbol you’ve placed is only one color in nature. (Any symbol that is more than one color, such as Electrostatic Sensitivity, Laser, Pacemaker and Two Person Lift, cannot be altered with different colors. Flag graphics' colors also cannot be changed).

=Adding Components from Library=
Protocase Designer's Library Manager includes a tab for Components, where you can quickly and easily download boards, connectors, drives, fans, heatsinks, LCD screens and power supplies, and then place on you rdesign.

==Add Components from Library==
#Once in the Face Editor, select Components from the Library drop-down menu in the top-right corner.
#You will see a small dialog box open that says Syncing Library. This This is an important step for being able to access all of the parts of the Library Manager.
#Click on tab labeled "Components." Scroll through the list of categories to find your desired component category type.
#Click on the component you wish to use. In order to access the component, you will need to download it to your local copy of Protocase Designer. Click Download.
#Once the component file has been downloaded, you will see three buttons: Place this item, Export to File and Create Personal Copy.
#Once you click Place this item, you will be prompted to choose your mounting fasteners, in the exact same way that you would see when you are importing your own STEP file of a component in your design.

==Save a Personal Copy of a Component in Your Library==
#If you want to save a copy of a component from the library with your desired fasteners, stay in the Face Editor.
#Click on the component you've placed with fasteners. Once it is selected, you will see a button on the right-hand menu called "Add to Library". Once you click this button, you will be prompted to edit the properties, including adding a personalized name for the component.
#Once you click OK, the grouped component will be saved in your personal library. You can access it and place it on your design by clicking the Personal tab in the Library Manager.

==Contribute to the Library Manager==
#You may save a cutout, graphic or component from your Personal Library and contribute it to the Public Library.
#Click the Add to Public Library button. Select the applicable category and sub-category, then click submit.
#The Protocase Designer team moderates the submissions - which can take 1-2 business days.
#Once your submission is cleared, the cutout, graphic or component you've added will show up in the public library.
#Remember – you should only add items to the public library if you want it to be accessible to others. Proprietary items for your organization should be kept to your own personal library.

=Importing Components=
You can import STEP or DXF components of circuit boards, fans and other accessories.

==Importing STEP Files==
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, in the right-hand corner, select '''Import 3D Component''' from the Import/Export Dropdown Menu.
#:[[File:1 Import Export Drop down Go.PNG|400px]]
#Protocase Designer will open a browser window so you can select the STEP file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#If your file is very large, Protocase Designer will display a loading warning. If the software takes longer than a minute or two to import your component, you may need to simplify the STEP file before importing it.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#:[[File:2 Component Choose Mating Face.PNG|600px]]
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
[[File:4 PEM Editor Dialog.PNG|600px]]
#Click '''Place Fasteners''' to open the Fasteners library. Choose the fastener you'd like to place.
#:[[File:5 Choose Fasteners and click Place This Item.PNG|600px]]
#Place the fastener in the appropriate mounting holes.
#:[[File:6 Place the Fastener where you want the component mounted.PNG|600px]]
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:7 once youve clicked Save to save your changes, you will see your component with fasteners in the Face Editor on your model.PNG|600px]]
 

==Importing DXF Files==
#Importing a DXF file of a component follows many of the same steps as importing a STEP file, with a few additional steps required.
#In the 3D viewer, click Edit Face and select the face onto which you want to mount your component.
#Once in the Face Editor, under Imports, click Component. Protocase designer will open a browser window so you can select the DXF file you'd like to import. (Note: In order to see your component file, you may need to go to the Files of Type dropdown to change it from Body Files to All Files.)
#Once Protocase Designer detects it is a DXF file being imported, an additional window will display that will allow you to customize how the DXF will be imported.
##Layers: DXF files contain many layers, and Protocase Designer cannot detect which layers actually need to be used. Use this tool to select which layers of your DXF you'd like to import.
##Thickness: Protocase Designer cannot automatically detect the thickness of your DXF file, so you can use this tool to set your thickness. Two important things to note – the thickness value is in inches – and your thickness choice will not be visible until the component is displayed in Protocase Designer’s 3D Editor.
##Units: Protocase Designer cannot currently detect units in DXF files (we are working on this!), so you will need to change the expected units. You can view the over bounds, which are displayed in inches. If you change the unit of measurement, the software will update the over bounds automatically. If your ideal unit of measurement is not listed as an option, you will need to convert the DXF’s units to inches before importing into Protocase Designer.
[[File:1 DXF Properties Selection.PNG|600px]]
#Once you have addressed Layers, Thickness and Units and made your desired changes, click the Accept button to save your changes and close the import tool. Protocase Designer will use the data you entered to generate a component from the DXF file you originally imported.
#Once your component file has been imported, you can select the face of your component that you would like mated with the face you are currently editing. Note: the exact spot where you place your cursor on a flat surface doesn’t matter. But be careful to not place your cursor on a small feature such as a pin or other part of your component that you don’t actually want to choose as your mating face.
#Once you click accept, you will be taken to the PEM editor dialog. This is where you can select the fasteners you want to mount your component.
(Tip: Make sure "Snap to Grid" is turned off, as it will allow you to place your fasteners precisely where you require them).
[[File:File:2 DXF Place Fasteners.PNG|600px]]
#Click the checkmark to save your changes.
#Once back in the Face Editor, you can move your component to the desired location on the face, change the rotation, as well as make other edits to the face, including adding cutouts, graphics and more.
#:[[File:3 DXF in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

==Changing Your Mounting Fasteners==
#Because you placed your mounting self-clinching fasteners in the Secondary Face Editor (as recommended), Protocase Designer makes your components and the fasteners a grouped object.
#Select your component (which is a grouped object with your fasteners). In the right-hand menu, click Edit.
#You will return to the Secondary Face Editor, where you can select and delete the fasteners you previously chose, and add in new ones as needed.

==Use Component Projection==
#Use the Component Projection feature to view an outline of your components when editing other faces in your Protocase Designer assembly.
#Once in the Face Editor, click on the View tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:View tab in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]
#In the Components section, click the '''Show Outline''' checkbox.
#:[[File:View Tab in Face Editor Component Projection Outline.PNG|300px]]
#To control the amount of detail shown in your component projection outline, use the slider. Far left means very little detail. The farther to the right you go, the level of detail increases.
#:[[File:Component Projection in Face Editor.PNG|600px]]

=Manipulating objects=
==Selecting object(s)==
#On the '''Design''' tab in the Face Editor toolbar, select the '''Move''' tool. [[File:tool -edit_NEW.png|40px|bottom]]
#Do one of the following:
#*To select a filled object, click anywhere on the object.
#*To select an unfilled object, click the border of the object.
#*To select multiple objects:
#**Click the first object, then down the <Shift> key and click the other objects; or
#**Click and drag a selection box over all the objects.
#:[[File:Selecting Objects.PNG|600px]]
#:A light blue box is drawn each selected object, the origin of each object is displayed in red, and gray circles are drawn around each node.
#:[[File:Light Blue box is drawn.PNG|300px]]

==Editing object(s)==
'''''To edit a single object''''' 
*Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar, select the object, then edit any of the fields in the '''[[Face_Editor#Managing_object_properties| Properties panel]]'''.
''or''
*Right-click the object and choose an editing command ('''Delete''', '''Rotate''', '''Properties''', '''Send Behind''', or '''Merge''') from the floating menu. If you choose '''Properties''', the Properties dialog opens, where you can edit additional properties specific to that object type.
 
'''''To edit a group''''' 
*To edit a group, you must right-click to ungroup the items, then edit the object(s) individually. If you wish, you can right-click to make the objects a group once more.

==Moving object(s)==
To move a single object: 
#Select the object.
#Click anywhere on the object and drag to the desired location. 

To move several objects: 
#Select all the objects.
#Press and hold the Shift key, then click any of the objects and drag to the desired location. 

To move cutouts from one face to another:
#On each face that you want to switch, group the items, add the group as a single cutout to your cutout library, then delete the items.
#Add each grouped cutout from the Cutout Library to the desired face, then use the '''Measure''' tool to adjust the placement. Once the placement is correct, you can ungroup the items so they are easier to work with.
:For detailed instructions, see:
:*[[#Adding_cutouts|Adding cutouts]]
:*[[#Measuring_distances|Measuring distances]] 

==Locking item(s)==
To lock a single object:
#Select the object.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the item.
#:[[File:Locking items.PNG|600px]]
 
To Lock several objects:
#Hold the shift button, and select all the objects you wish to lock.
#Check the "Locked" checkbox under the properties menu to lock the items. 

==Grouping and ungrouping objects==
'''''To group objects'''''

#Click and drag the mouse to draw a box around the objects you want to group, or hold down the <Shift> key and select each object.
#Right click and select Group from the menu that displays.
#:[[File:1 Right click to Group Objects.PNG|400px]]
#Your objects are now grouped as one single object, which you can move around on the face of your model.
#:[[File:1 Grouped Object.PNG|400px]]
 
'''''To ungroup objects'''''
#Click the '''Edit''' button on the Mode toolbar.
#Click the group.
#Click the '''ungroup''' button in the Properties panel. 
'''Note''' When grouped, the origin for the group is the origin of the first object created in the group. If you are saving a group as a cutout in the Cutout Library, then after saving it, you might want to '''[[Cutout_Library#Changing_the_origin_of_an_existing_cutout | change the origin]]''' to make it more useful for later placement. 
'''See Also'''
*[[FAQ#Is_there_an_easy_way_to_switch_the_faces_for_cutouts.3F_I_want_to_move_the_cutouts_from_the_front_to_the_back_face_and_vice_versa. | Grouping objects to switch faces for cutouts]]
*[[Cutout_Library#Saving_a_custom_cutout_to_the_Library_from_the_Face_Editor | Saving a group of objects as a single cutout to the Cutout Library]] 

==Aligning and distributing objects==
You can arrange objects on a face using the Alignment and Distribute commands.

#Select 2 or more objects.
#With the objects selected, right click and select either Align or Distribute the menu. 
#:[[File:Align Objects with objects selected.PNG|500px]]
'''Alignment''' 
[[File:button-align-originvert.png]] Align Origins of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-top.png]] Align Tops of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centervert.png]] Align Centers of Objects Vertically 
[[File:button-align-bottom.png]] Align Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-align-originhoriz.png]] Align Origins of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-left.png]] Align Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-align-centerhoriz.png]] Align Centers of Objects Horizontally 
[[File:button-align-right.png]] Align Right Sides of Objects 
 
'''''Notes:'''''
*Objects align to the first object selected.
*When using the selection marquee, objects align to the last object created.

'''Distribute''' 
#:[[File:Distribute Horizontally.PNG|500px]]

[[File:button-distribute-originvert.png]] Distribute Origins Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-spacevert.png]] Distribute Space Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-top.png]] Distribute Distance Between Tops 
[[File:button-distribute-centervert.png]] Distribute Centers Vertically 
[[File:button-distribute-bottom.png]] Distribute Bottoms of Objects 
 
[[File:button-distribute-originhoriz.png]] Distribute Origins Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-spacehoriz.png]] Distribute Space Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-left.png]] Distribute Left Sides of Objects 
[[File:button-distribute-centerhoriz.png]] Distribute Centers Horizontally 
[[File:button-distribute-right.png]] Distribute Right Side of Objects 

==Cutting, copying, and pasting objects==
#You can find the cut, copy, paste, undo and redo functions in the '''Edit''' section of the Design tab in the toolbar.
#:[[File:Cutting copying and pasting objects buttons.PNG|200px]]
#To cut the object(s), click the '''Cut''' button. To copy the object(s), click the '''Copy''' button.
#After copying or cutting, click the '''Paste''' button.
#:A copy of the object(s) is displayed under the cursor.
#Click the face to place the copied or cut object(s) at that location.
#Continue placing object(s) on the face and click the '''Move''' tool or press the <Esc> key when you are done. 

Click the '''Undo''' [[File:keyslot_undo_button_NEW.png]] or '''Redo''' [[File:redo_button_NEW.png]] buttons in the Edit section of the toolbar. 

==Adding and managing layers==
When working with complex designs, layering lets you group similar elements and hide all other elements in the editor. It can also affect the end product, depending on what is being layered. The default layer is always present and is always used first.

'''Layer Toolbar'''

Each layer has its own toolbar, with the following buttons:
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveUpInList.jpg]] Move the layer up in the list.
:[[File:button-Layers-MoveDownInList.jpg]] Move the layer down in the list. '''Note:''' The two Move buttons position the layers in the order that they will be produced, and in the order that they are drawn on the screen. The one exception to this is that cutouts are always displayed on top.
:[[File:button-Layers-EditLayer.jpg]] Edit the layer.
:[[File:button-Layers-ShowHideLayer.jpg]] Show/hide the layer. (This is a toggle button.)
:[[File:button-Layers-DeleteLayer.jpg]] Delete the layer.

'''''To add a new layer '''''
#In the Face Editor, click the (unlabeled) '''New Layer''' button at the top of the '''Properties''' panel.
#:[[File:Adding and managing layers.PNG|300px]]
#:The Input dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the layer (examples you might use: Output, Input, Buttons, Graphics, Power, Lights).
#:The layer is added to the Properties panel with its toolbar, and is automatically selected as the current layer.

'''''To copy and paste between layers'''''
#Cut or copy the object(s) from one layer.
#Select the layer where you want the object(s) to be placed.
#Paste the object(s).

'''Important!''' When working with layers, be sure to check which layer you are working on before making any edits. The current layer is highlighted in the list. 

==Using the Array Tool==
The Array tool allows you to link a group of objects together that are placed on the face of the enclosure or part, such as self-cinching fasteners, cutouts or images. Using this tool,
you can position the objects relative to each other, or move them as a group, which is useful for keeping alignment and maintaining even spacing between objects.

'''To create an array:'''
#Click the "Edit Face" button on the Edit tool bar, and then select the face you wish to work from.
#Create and/or select the object you wish to use.
#With the object highlighted, select the "Pattern" tool in the Design tab of the toolbar.
#:[[File:Array pattern icon.PNG|100px]]
#Choose your preferred array type (Linear, Circle, or Rectangle.)
#:[[File:Select Array Type.PNG|200px]]

You will then be prompted to set the parameters to different dimensions. Each array type has different parameters:

'''A linear array will create a line of objects. Its parameters are:'''
*Angle (the angle from the x-axis to create the array)
*Spacing (the distance between objects in the array)
*Quantity (the number of objects in the array
#:[[File:Array Linear Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A circular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a circle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*Total Radius (the radius of the outermost row)
*Number of rings (the number of rows of objects)
*Quantity in 1st ring (the number of objects in the first circle)
#:[[File:Array Circular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

'''A rectangular array takes your initial object, and repeats it in a rectangle around the original object. Its parameters are:'''
*X Spacing (horizontal spacing)
*Y Spacing (vertical spacing)
*X Quantity (number of columns)
*Y Quantity (number of rows)
#:[[File:Array Rectangular Parameters.PNG|200px]]

Note: Arrays can be ungrouped by selecting the "ungroup" button in the properties panel. However, make sure that the snap function is turned off in order to ensure that
your objects are properly spaced.

#:[[File:Resize array.PNG|400px]]

=Printing one or more faces on paper for review=

===To print one face, or all faces, of the enclosure===
#To print all faces of the enclosure, go to the '''View''' tab of the toolbar in the 3D Viewer.
#:[[File:View Print icon.PNG|400px]]
#Click the Print icon.
#:[[File:Print Icon.PNG|100px]]
#In the dialog that opens, select the printer.
#When verifying a design, set the '''Absolute Scale''' to 100%, then tape together the multiple sheets that are printed. To make a small-scale model, set it to 50% or whatever scale you want.
#:[[File:Print to Scale.PNG|400px]]
#Click '''Print.'''

===To calibrate the printer===
Many printing devices do not print the correct size even when you specify 100%. Before you print a face, be sure to calibrate your printer.
#In the '''Print to Scale''' dialog, select the printer, then click the '''Calibrate Printer''' button.
#A test page opens.
#Click '''Print''' to print the test page. Then use a ruler or caliper to measure the width and height of the printed rectangle.
#The '''Record Measurements''' dialog opens.
#If the printed rectangle is not 3" x 3", then enter the '''Measured Width''' (in inches) and the '''Measured Height''' (in inches) and click '''OK'''. 
 

=Exporting and importing face templates=
You can export a face to a .PNG file for editing in a third-party graphics editor, and you can import the edited .PNG back into the Face Editor. This feature is useful when reviewing designs, using them in slideshows or other presentations, or making complex graphical edits to a face where a global image of the face with its cutouts are necessary for proper alignment of the graphics. In this latter case, as described in the steps below, you export the face with all its cutouts and other elements to a .PNG file, add the graphics to that .PNG using your third-party graphics editor, and then import the revised .PNG back into Designer. 
If you only have a single image that you want to import, you may want to instead import it using the '''Image''' tool instead, which does not involve exporting the cutouts. For details, see [[Face_Editor#Adding_images|'''Adding images''']].
#Make sure that the face you want to export is displayed in the Face Editor.
#Select '''Graphics > Export Graphics template'''. The Save dialog opens.
#Enter a name for the .PNG file and click '''Save'''. A properly scaled .PNG of the face is created, complete with all cutouts and other elements.
#Open the exported file with your graphics editor and add the images/text to be silkscreened or digitally printed, aligning them appropriately with the cutouts, which are displayed in pink (hexadecimal value FF9999). (Note that this is the one color you cannot use for your graphics ink in Designer, because Protocase Designer will always recognize this color as a cutout and never as a graphic.) Ensure that you do not add any image or text over the cutouts. Additionally, if the face contained any text or images when you exported it, they will be retained when you import the file back into Designer, and will overlay the original graphics. You can remove these from the exported file before you import it back into the face, or else remove the duplications after you import it.
#When done editing, save the file again in .PNG format.
#To import the revised face back into your enclosure design, first ensure that the face is displayed in the Face Editor, then select '''Graphics > Import graphics template''' and choose the .PNG file you just saved. The imported file overlays the entire face, and you can move or delete it just like a normally imported image.
#If you need to make additional graphical changes that cannot be done with Designer and you have not made changes to the cutouts or other elements of the face, simply edit the .PNG file again in your graphics editor, and re-import it to the Face Editor. You do not need to remove it from the face first; it will be automatically replaced by the most recently imported file, as long as it has the same name.
:'''See Also''': To import a graphics file to be silkscreened or digitally printed on a face, see '''[[Face_Editor#Adding_images|Adding images]]'''.

Preferences dialog box

2022-05-23T16:48:14Z

Amacdonald:

__NOTOC__
To view and change global options for Designer, click '''Edit''' > '''Preferences'''. The dialog opens, with Display Preferences grouped at the top, and User Preferences below. Scroll down this topic for details on each option. 
[[File:Preferences Dialog Box.PNG]]
==Display Preferences==

===Display Units===
Click the arrow to choose '''INCHES''', '''CM''', or '''MM'''. The selected unit is used for all measurements (drawing/editing objects, measuring distances, etcetera).

==='''Default Grid Size Width''' and '''Default Grid Size Height'''===
Click the up- or down-arrow to select the default grid size. If '''Display Units''' is inches, the default is 1; if Display Units is cm or mm, the default is 25. You can change the grid size as needed, using the '''Grid Size''' button in the Face Editor toolbar. '''Note''': Changing these values does not change the grid width and height in the Face Editor until you close and reload the face.

===Number of Digits for Precision===
Click the up- or down-arrow to specify the number of decimal digits in each numeric value.

===Default Font===
Click the down-arrow to choose the default for each of the following:
:'''Family''' (Handwriting, Lucida Sans, Courier New, Arial, etcetera)
:'''Size''' (9 pt to 99 pt)
:'''Style''' (Regular, Bold, Bold Italic, Italic)

===Grid Opacity===
Move the slider on the line scale to set the default opacity of the grid lines, from 0 (0%, or fully transparent) to 10 (100%, or fully black). The default is 3 (30%). You can change the opacity as needed, using the '''Grid Size''' button in the Face Editor toolbar. '''Note''': Changing this value does not change the grid opacity in the Face Editor until you close and reload the face.

===Silkscreen Render Quality===
Move the slider on the line scale to set the clarity of the display of silkscreen graphics in the 3D View, from 0 to 8. If you encounter out-of-memory errors, lower this setting; the images will not be as clear, but rendering will be faster and without memory errors.

===Render Outlines in 3D Viewer===
Select this check box to have the 3D view outline each cutout.

===Measurement for Circles and Arcs===
Click the '''Diameter''' or '''Radius''' button to have the Properties panel display circle and arc sizes in that measurement. The default setting is '''Diameter'''.

===Change Background Color===
Click this bar to select a different background color for the work area. A dialog opens where you can select from '''Swatches''', '''HSV''', '''HSL''', '''RGB''', or '''CYMY''' colors. To return the background color to the previous setting, click the '''Reset''' button.

==User Preferences==

===Home Directory ===
Enter the folder name and path (or click the '''Browse''' button to select the folder) as the default location for saved files.

===Remember Last Directory===
Select this option to have Designer use the last folder used to save or load a file as the default location for subsequent files.

===Proxy Settings===
If your company uses a network configured such that your computer accesses the Internet through a proxy server, select the '''Use Proxy for http''' check box, then enter the proxy '''address''' and '''port''' number supplied by your network administrator.

===Accept property changes when===
Select the '''Enter Key Pressed''' button to have changes to values in the Properties panel accepted only when <Enter> is pressed. Select the '''Mouse Leaves Form''' button to have changes accepted when the mouse pointer is moved off the Properties panel.

===Error Response===
Select the action you want Designer to take when it encounters a placement problem such as an object placed across or outside a face boundary or overlapping an exclusion zone, masking on cold rolled steel, a PEM placed too near a face boundary, or a graphic placed around a circular cutout.
:'''ACCEPT''': Accept the placement. If the placement is across a face boundary, the boundary will be automatically cut ''if'' the '''Cut Face''' option has been selected.
:'''REJECT''': Reject the placement.
:'''ASK''': Prompt you to choose whether to accept or reject the placement.

===Cut Face===
Select this option to have the boundary automatically cut when any part of an object is placed or moved onto a boundary.

===Allow Editing by Dragging Objects (Free Edit)===
Select this check box to allow you, after clicking the '''Edit''' tool, to move objects by clicking and dragging them and to resize them by clicking and dragging their nodes. Clear the check box to restrict the changing of an object’s position and/or size with the Properties panel only.

===Never Show What’s New===
Select this check box to ''not'' open the link to the Release Notes page in the Designer wiki when launching a new version of Designer.

===Graphics Type===
Click the down-arrow to choose the default method to print graphics. Choose '''ASK''' if you want to be prompted to choose the method the first time you apply graphics to a face.
:'''SILKSCREEN'''
:'''DIRECT_PRINTING''' (digital print)
:'''ASK'''